C

V
-
7
0
0

S
e
r
i
e
s


U
s
e
r

s

M
a
n
u
a
l
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
KEYENCE CORPORATION, 2000 CV700-UM-3-0202 Printed in Japan
Users Manual
High-speed, High-accuracy, Color Vision System
CV-700 Series
96M0568
AFFILIATED COMPANIES
KEYENCE CORPORATION OF AMERICA
Phone: 201-930-0100 Fax: 201-930-0099
KEYENCE DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Phone: 06102-36 89-0 Fax: 06102-36 89-100
KEYENCE (UK) LIMITED
Phone: 01908-696900 Fax: 01908-696777
KEYENCE FRANCE S.A.
Phone: 01 47 92 76 76 Fax: 01 47 92 76 77
KEYENCE SINGAPORE PTE LTD
Phone: 392-1011 Fax: 392-5055
KEYENCE (MALAYSIA) SDN BHD
Phone: 03-252-2211 Fax: 03-252-2131
KEYENCE CORPORATION
1-3-14, Higashi-Nakajima,
Higashi-Yodogawa-ku,
Osaka, 533-8555, Japan
Phone: 81-6-6379-2211
Fax: 81-6-6379-2131
KEYENCE (THAILAND) CO., LTD
Phone: 02-369-2777 Fax: 02-369-2775
KEYENCE TAIWAN CO., LTD
Phone: 02-2627-3100 Fax: 02-2798-8925
KEYENCE (HONG KONG) CO., LTD
Phone: 3104-1010 Fax: 3104-1080
KEYENCE INTERNATIONAL TRADING
(SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.
Phone: 021-68757500 Fax: 021-68757550
KEYENCE KOREA CORPORATION
Phone: 02-563-1270 Fax: 02-563-1271
Preface
This instruction manual describes the setting procedures, adjustment, preparation,
operation procedures, and precautions for the High-speed, High-accuracy, Color
Vision System CV-700(P) Series. Before starting operation, please read this
manual carefully to get the most from your CV-700(P) Series.
Keep this manual handy for future reference.
Please make sure that the end users are provided with this manual.
Symbols
The following symbols are used for the list of precautions to ensure safety and to
prevent personal injury and/or property damage when using the CV-700(P) Series.
The following symbols alert you to important messages. Be sure to read these
messages carefully.
Failure to follow instructions may lead to death or serious
injury.
Failure to follow instructions may lead to injury.
Failure to follow instructions may lead to product damage.
(product malfunctions, etc.)
Provides important precautions and restrictions on proper
operation.
Provides additional information on proper operation.
Provides useful information on proper operation.
Provides reference pages.
General precautions
1. No part of this manual may be reprinted or reproduced in any form or by any
means without the prior written permission of KEYENCE CORPORATION.
2. The content of this manual is subject to change without notice.
3. KEYENCE has thoroughly checked and reviewed this manual. Please contact
the sales office listed at the end of this manual if you have any questions or
comments regarding this manual, or if you find an error.
4. KEYENCE assumes no liability for damages resulting from the use of the
information in this manual, item 3 above notwithstanding.
5. KEYENCE will replace any incomplete or incorrectly collated manual.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation of America.
CompactFlash
TM
is a registered trademark of SanDisk Corporation of America.
All company names and product names in this manual are registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective owners.
WARNING
CAUTION
Important:
i
Note:
Reference:
DANGER
Tips
Safety Precautions
General precautions
At startup and during operation, be sure to monitor the functions and perfor-
mance of the CV-701(P)/751(P).
We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage
in the event of a problem.
Do not modify the CV-701(P)/751(P) or use it in any way other than as de-
scribed in the specifications. Its functions and performance are not guaranteed
under said conditions.
When the CV-701(P)/751(P) is used in combination with other instruments, its
functions and performance may be degraded, depending on the operating
conditions and surrounding environment.
Do not use the CV-701(P)/751(P) for the purpose of protecting the human body.
Do not expose the CV-701(P)/751(P) and peripheral devices to sudden tem-
perature change, as this may cause condensation.
Precautions
Do not use the CV-701(P)/751(P) with a voltage other than 24 VDC, as this
may cause fire, electric shock or equipment failure.
Do not disassemble or modify the CV-701(P)/751(P). This may cause fire or
electric shock.
I Usage
Be sure to turn off the power to the CV-701(P)/751(P) and any connected
devices before connecting or disconnecting the cables. Otherwise, the camera
and connected devices may be damaged.
Do not turn off the power while setting a parameter. Otherwise, the settings
may be partially or completely lost.
Do not block the ventilation slots on the CV-701(P) and peripheral devices. A
rise in inner temperature may cause equipment failure.
Note: The CV-701(P)/751(P) conforms to CE regulations in Europe; however,
please make sure to keep the wiring for the power and the I/O within 30 m.
Otherwise, it will not conform to EN61326-1.
WARNING
CAUTION
ii
I Proper environment and conditions
To use the CV-701(P)/751(P) properly and safely, do not install the CV-
701(P)/751(P) in locations with the following conditions. Use of this equip-
ment in an improper environment may cause fire, electric shock, or equip-
ment failure.
Locations with high humidity, a large amount of dust, or poor ventilation
Locations where the temperature rises excessively due to direct sunlight, etc.
Locations where corrosive or flammable gas exists
Locations where the CV-701(P)/751(P) is directly subjected to vibration or
impact
Locations where water, oil or chemicals may splash the CV-701(P)/751(P)
Locate the cables as far as possible from high-voltage lines and power lines.
Otherwise, generated noise may cause a malfunction or equipment failure.
The CV-701(P)/751(P) and peripheral devices are precision machines. Avoid
any vibration or impact to these devices.
Locations where static electricity is easily built up
I When abnormal conditions are encountered
If the following conditions are encountered, immediately turn off the power.
Continuing to use the CV-701(P)/751(P) under abnormal conditions may
cause fire, electric shock or equipment failure.
Contact your nearest KEYENCE sales office for repairs.
When water or foreign matter enters the controller.
When the CV-701(P)/751(P) is dropped or the housing is damaged.
When the controller produces smoke or an abnormal smell.
Note 1: Maintenance
Do not wipe the CV-701(P)/751(P) with a damp cloth or a cloth moistened with
benzine, thinner, or alcohol. This may cause discoloration or deformation of the
unit. If there is a large amount of dust or dirt on the CV-701(P)/751(P), remove it
using a tightly squeezed cloth moistened with a dilute solution of a neutral deter-
gent, and then wipe the unit with a soft and dry cloth.
Note 2: Camera
The CV-701(P)/751(P) uses a specially designed camera. A commercially avail-
able camera should not be substituted. (However, any commercially available C-
mount lens can be used.)
WARNING
iii
Symbol Description
[ ] Menu item. Select from display.
[ ] Switches and keys.
Symbols
The following symbols are used in this manual to represent the menu items and
keys.
1
2
iv
How This Manual is Organized
Chapter 1 Overview
Describes the package contents check and the features and applications of the
CV-701(P)/751(P).
Chapter 2 Preparation
Describes how to connect and mount the CV-701(P)/751(P), how to select lenses,
and gives information about illumination.
Chapter 3 Mode Selection
Explains the types and details of the measurement modes.
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
Describes how to use panel keys or the remote control console to set the CV-
701(P)/751(P). It covers everything from basic settings to the advanced settings.
Chapter 5 Operation
This chapter describes RUN mode and the controls available during RUN mode
operation.
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
Explains the input/output timing and analog output.
Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory
Explains how to use CompactFlash memory with the CV-701(P)/751(P).
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
Describes the connection between the CV-701(P)/751(P) and a personal com-
puter, and the RS-232C communication used to operate the CV-701(P)/751(P)
with a personal computer.
Chapter 9 Specifications
Describes the specifications and dimensions.
Appendices
Describes typical troubleshooting procedures, a list of optional parts.
WARRANTIES
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
W
A
R
R
A
N
T
I
E
S
Contents
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 Checking the Package Contents .......................................................... 2
1.2 Part Names and Functions .................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Part Names and functions of a basic system............................................ 3
Chapter 2 Preparation
2.1 Mounting and Connection ..................................................................... 6
2.1.1 Mounting the controller ............................................................................. 6
2.1.2 Mounting the camera ................................................................................ 8
2.1.3 Selecting a lens......................................................................................... 9
2.1.4 Cable connection and wiring................................................................... 11
2.1.5 Checking the connection......................................................................... 13
2.2 Illumination ........................................................................................... 15
Chapter 3 Preparation
3.1 Measurement Modes and Typical Applications ................................ 18
3.1.1 ARE/CON (Area continuous) ................................................................ 18
3.1.2 INS/TRG (Inspection trigger) ................................................................ 19
3.1.3 INS+POS (Inspection + position).......................................................... 22
3.1.4 ABS.POS (Absolute position) ............................................................... 23
3.1.5 REL.POS Mode .................................................................................... 25
3.2 Selecting the Measurement Mode by Application ............................ 27
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
4.1 Names and Functions of Control Keys and Monitor Screen ........... 32
4.1.1 Controller ................................................................................................ 32
4.1.2 Screen page layout ................................................................................. 34
4.2 Preparations ......................................................................................... 35
4.2.1 Preparations before settings ................................................................... 35
4.3 Basic Settings ...................................................................................... 36
4.3.1 Basic setting procedures......................................................................... 36
4.3.2 Using two cameras ................................................................................. 42
4.4 AREA Mode Basic Settings ............................................................. 57
4.4.1 AREA mode.......................................................................................... 57
4.4.2 Initial menu screen.................................................................................. 58
4.4.3 Basic setting flow .................................................................................... 59
4.5 AREA Mode Advanced Settings ..................................................... 65
4.5.1 AREA/CON menu................................................................................. 65
4.5.2 Advanced color settings .......................................................................... 69
4.6 INS Mode Basic Settings ................................................................. 70
v
Preface ............................................................................................................... i
Safety Precautions ........................................................................................... ii
How This Manual is Organized ...................................................................... iv
Contents ............................................................................................................ v
Menu Hierarchy ............................................................................................. viii
Special Features .............................................................................................. ix
vi
4.6.1 INS Mode.............................................................................................. 70
4.6.2 Initial menu screen.................................................................................. 72
4.6.3 Basic setting flow .................................................................................... 73
4.6.4 Basic setting procedure for the measurement mode .............................. 75
4.6.5 Basic setting procedure for COUNT ....................................................... 80
4.6.6 Basic setting procedure for the POINT (Point sensor) mode.................. 84
4.6.7 Basic setting procedure for the STAIN mode.......................................... 87
4.6.8 Basic setting procedure for the GRAVITY mode .................................... 91
4.7 INS Mode Advanced Settings .......................................................... 96
4.7.1 INS/TRG menu ..................................................................................... 96
4.7.2 Sensitivity adjustment for edge detection ............................................. 100
4.7.3 Adjustment for the COUNT and GRAVITY modes ............................... 101
4.7.4 Advanced COUNT setting..................................................................... 102
4.7.5 Adjusting the color extraction................................................................ 103
4.8 INS+POS Mode Basic Settings ...................................................... 106
4.8.1 Initial menu screen................................................................................ 106
4.8.2 Basic setting flow .................................................................................. 107
4.8.3 INS+POS menu .................................................................................. 108
4.9 Position Detection Mode Basic Settings ...................................... 109
4.9.1 Initial menu screen................................................................................ 110
4.9.2 Basic setting flow .................................................................................. 111
4.10 Position Detection Advanced Settings ....................................... 118
4.10.1 ABS.POS Menu ................................................................................ 118
4.10.2 REL.POS Menu ................................................................................ 124
4.10.3 Advanced position adjustment setting (Pattern search) ...................... 125
4.10.4 Advanced position adjustment setting (Edge detection) ..................... 127
4.10.5 Advanced position adjustment (Tolerance setting) ............................. 129
4.10.6 Sensitivity adjustment for edge detection ............................................ 130
4.10.7 Adjusting the color extraction .............................................................. 131
4.11 Optional Settings .............................................................................. 134
4.11.1 Saving the running images .................................................................. 134
4.11.2 Illumination adjustment function .......................................................... 136
4.11.3 Unit conversion.................................................................................... 137
4.12 Operation Check of the Setting Status ........................................... 140
4.12.1 Saving the setting status ..................................................................... 140
4.12.2 Comparing with the saved setting status............................................. 141
4.13 Initialization ....................................................................................... 142
4.13.1 Initialization of all settings.................................................................... 142
4.13.2 Initialization by program number ......................................................... 142
4.14 Input/Output Operation in PROGRAM Mode .................................. 143
4.15 Environmental Settings ................................................................... 144
4.15.1 Changing the environmental settings .................................................. 144
4.15.2 Environmental setting list .................................................................... 145
4.15.3 Useful functions ................................................................................... 146
Chapter 5 Operation
5.1 Entering RUN Mode ........................................................................... 152
5.2 Controls Available in RUN Mode ...................................................... 153
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
6.1 I/O Terminal Names and Functions .................................................. 156
6.2 Input/Output Timing Diagrams ......................................................... 160
6.3 I/O Circuit ............................................................................................ 165
6.4 Analog Output .................................................................................... 166
6.4.1 Analog output terminals ........................................................................ 166
6.4.2 Changing analog output settings .......................................................... 166
6.4.3 Scaling the analog output ..................................................................... 167
Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory
7.1 Mounting and Dismounting the CompactFlash Memory ............... 172
7.1.1 Mounting the CompactFlash memory ................................................... 172
7.1.2 Dismounting the CompactFlash memory .............................................. 172
7.2 Reading of Data to a Personal Computer ....................................... 173
7.3 How to Use CompactFlash Memory ................................................ 174
7.3.1 Parameter descriptions ......................................................................... 174
7.3.2 Saving the setting in CompactFlash memory ....................................... 175
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
8.1 Overview ............................................................................................. 180
8.1.1 Specifications ........................................................................................ 180
8.2 Connection ......................................................................................... 181
8.3 Commands and Data Formats .......................................................... 182
8.3.1 Commands in PROGRAM mode .......................................................... 182
8.3.2 Commands for CompactFlash memory ................................................ 187
8.3.3 Commands in RUN mode ..................................................................... 188
8.3.4 Output data format ................................................................................ 189
8.3.5 Command list ........................................................................................ 193
8.3.6 Applications of RS-232C communication setting .................................. 194
Chapter 9 Specifications
9.1 Specifications ..................................................................................... 196
9.2 Dimensions ......................................................................................... 198
Appendices
Appendix A General Troubleshooting ...................................................... 206
Appendix B Optional Parts List ................................................................. 208
Appendix C Index ....................................................................................... 210
Appendix D Sample Sheets for Setup Menu ............................................ 213
Appendix E Sample Sheets for Testing .................................................... 215
WARRANTIES
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS ............................................................ 217
vii
Menu Hierarchy
The following is the layered structure of the menu of the CV-701(P)/751(P). Param-
eters vary slightly depending on the measurement.
ARE/CON
INS/TRG
INS+POS
ABS.POS
REL.POS
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
WIND5
WIND6
WIND7
WIND8
No.00 page 36
(Allows program selection.)
MODE page 37
ARE/CON
(Allows selection from five
measurement modes.)
SHUTTER page 38
(Allows selection of shutter speed.)
SCRN REG page 39
(Registers the reference screen for
measurement.)
WIND1 page 41
(Sets the details of the
measurement area.)
DATA
TOL
H=
L=
OPTION page 134
(Allows optional settings.)
SAVE
T=xxxxxx
RAW SCR
WIND0
INSPECT
ARE/CON
SEL SCRN
COLOR page 44
(Extracts the colors
to be detected.)
DET
MEASURE page 50
(Sets the
measurement area.)
MASK
DATA
TOL
H=
L=
viii
Special Features
Implements the highest detection power possible with the KEYENCE
pioneered Color gradation processing (Patent pending).
Reliably detects only the designated colors.
Enables the reliable extraction of targets that are hard to differentiate with
conventional monochromatic processing. (e.g. differentiation of yellow on white,
dark blue from black, and gold plate from silver plate, etc.)
A change of background colors does not require a change of settings, because the
CV-701(P)/751(P) detects the registered colors exclusively.
Shadows on the target surface do not cause malfunctions.
Detection is unstable with conventional monochromatic processing, which detects
the brightness of the target, because it is affected by shadows given by the shape
of the targets and by the varied illumination distributions. Color concentration
processing enhances stability dramatically because detection is based on the color
differences.
I Operating principals
The CV-701(P)/751(P) converts the color signal of the image captured by the
camera into R/G/B/ digital data using an A/D converting circuit.
It obtains the data of R-G, G-B, R-B based on the
converted digital data. The measurement area for
the color extraction is set based on six parameters.
The [AREA] mode (color binary conversion pro-
cessing) operates detection by judging whether the
measured values are within or outside the color
extraction area. The colors within the color extrac-
tion area are of the maximum gradation level (255
levels of gray) with color concentration processing. The CV-701(P)/751(P) oper-
ates gray processing by converting the color data into a monochromatic image so
that the level is reduced as the color falls outside the area.
This processing method realizes stable detection for colors with different values
but with the same hue, and for colors without a hue such as white, black, and
gray.
Simple operation for highly sophisticated image processing functions.
Saves boot-up time dramatically.
Simple click extraction: Simply place and click the cursor on the color
area to be detected to set the colors for extraction. No complicated
parameter settings are necessary.
Setting is simple enough for first-time use for sophisticated image processing.
Loaded with special features
The screen-saving function allows you to go back and check a former
detection screen.
The CompactFlash memory comes standard with the CV-701(P)/751(P).
Back up of the detection hysteresis and multiple programs, and copying
between controllers can be operated easily without using a personal
computer.
The measurement result can be output in analog voltage (0 to 4 V).
R
G
B
R G
B G
R B
Judgment
output
Data output
Camera
J udgment/
Output
Margin
setting
Image
processing
Extraction
judgment
Subtraction
operation
A/D
conversion
0
255
C
o
l
o
r
e
x
t
r
a
c
t
i
o
n
a
r
e
a
Levels of gray
Color (16,770,000 colors)
ix
Chapter 1
Overview
This section describes the package contents check and the features and
applications of the CV-701(P)/751(P).
1.1 Checking the Package Contents ......................................... 2
1.2 Part Names and Functions .................................................. 3
1.2.1 Part Names and functions of a basic system........................... 3
Chapter 1 Overview
2
1
1.1 Checking the Package Contents
The CV-701(P)/751(P) packages include the following parts and equipment. Check
that all parts and equipment are included in the packages.
I CV-751(P)
I CV-701(P)
I CV-070
Controller (CV-751(P)): 1
Controller (CV-701(P)): 1
Camera (CV-070): 1 Plastic fitting: 1 Mounting bracket: 1
M3 x 6 screws (2)
Washer (2)
M3 x 6 plastic screws (2)
Plastic washer (2)
Remote control console: 1
Monitor cable (RCA-RCA): 1
Users manual: 1
Panel-mounting brackets: 4 Users manual: 1
Ferrite cores: 2
Ferrite cores: 2
Chapter 1 Overview
3
1
Control selector Remote control console
(Option: OP-30938)
Monitor (Option: CV-M30)
Camera 2
Lens (Option)
Camera 1
(CV-070)
24 VDC power
supply unit
(Option: KV-U3 or
KV-U6W)
Panel keys
Modular connector
Connection for the remote control
console or the RS-232C commu-
nication cable.
Compact Flash memory slot
I/O connector
Analog output
terminal
Video output
terminal
Connection for
the monitor.
Camera connector
Connection for the
camera cable. Power input terminal
(24 VDC, 0 V)
The input terminal of the 24
VDC (1.4 A) power supply.
Monitor adjustment trimmer
Adjust the brightness and
color of the monitor.
Power indicator
Illuminates when power is supplied.
Monitor
I/O terminal
Used to input and
output signals.
Controller selector
Switches control between
the panel keys and the
remote control console.
1.2 Part Names and Functions
This section describes the part names and functions of the CV-701(P)/751(P) and
an example of a complete system.
1.2.1 Part Names and functions of a basic system
I CV-751(P)
Chapter 1 Overview
4
1
Modular connector
Connection for the remote control
console or the RS-232C commu-
nication cable.
Power indicator
Illuminates when
power is supplied.
Power input terminal
(24 VDC, 0 V)
The input terminal of the 24
VDC (700 mA) power supply.
I/O terminal
Used to input and
output signals.
Camera connector
Connection for the
camera cable.
Video output
terminal
Connection for a
monitor.
Analog output
terminal
I/O connector
Compact Flash memory slot
Monitor
(Option: CV-M30)
Remote control console
(Accessory)
24 VDC power
supply unit
(Option: KV-U3
or KV-U6W)
Camera 1
(CV-070)
Lens (Option)
Camera 2
I CV-701(P)
Chapter 2
Preparation
This section describes how to connect and mount the CV-701(P)/751(P),
how to select a lens, and gives information about illumination.
2.1 Mounting and Connection .................................................... 6
2.1.1 Mounting the controller ............................................................ 6
2.1.2 Mounting the camera ............................................................... 8
2.1.3 Selecting a lens ....................................................................... 9
2.1.4 Cable connection and wiring.................................................. 11
2.1.5 Checking the connection ....................................................... 13
2.2 Illumination .......................................................................... 15
Chapter 2 Preparation
6
2
2.1 Mounting and Connection
This section describes how to mount the controller and camera, connect cables,
and select a lens.
2.1.1 Mounting the controller
CV-751(P) (Built-in-monitor type)
I Panel mounting
1. Insert the controller from the front side of the panel.
2. Attach the resin caps to the mounting brackets.
3. Fit the mounting brackets into the four mounting slots on the side of the
controller. Tighten the screws with a Philips screwdriver.
Excessive tightening of the mounting bracket screw may deform the
controller housing. Limit the tightening torque to a maximum of 0.4 Nm.
I Mounting to the stand (Option: OP-35481)
Contents: Stand: 1, M4 x l 8 screw (3)
1. Fix the stand to a panel with two M6 screws.
2. Insert the controller into the stand.
3. Fix the controller to the stand from both sides with the two supplied M4 screws.
CAUTION
Mounting
bracket
3. Fit the mounting
brackets into the
slot.
2. Resin cap
Slots for mounting
brackets
Panel
1. Controller
Slots for
mounting
brackets
2.
1. M6 screw
3. M4 screw
3. M4 screw
Chapter 2 Preparation
7
2
CAUTION
4. Fix the controller with the supplied M4 screw as required.
Do not place the controller upside down.
Do not block the ventilation slots. High temperature inside the controller
may cause malfunctions.
CV-701(P)
I DIN rail mounting
The controller is designed to be mounted
to a DIN rail. To mount or dismount the
controller, move the claw at the bottom of
the controller in the direction of the arrow.
I Screw mounting
Mount the controller using four M4
screws for the four holes on the
controller.
I Mounting position
Mount the controller with the front facing the operator, facing up, or vertically
with the front facing the operator.
Allow sufficient space (approx. 30 mm) for ventilation around the controller.
Do not place the controller upside down.
Do not block the ventilation slots. High temperature inside the controller
may cause malfunctions.
Fix the controller with the
supplied M4 screw according
to the desired angle.
Retractable
mounting claw
CAUTION
Horizontally with front
facing the operator:
Correct
With front facing
up:
Correct
Vertically with front
facing the operator:
Correct
Upside down with
front facing the
operator:
Incorrect
Chapter 2 Preparation
8
2
2.1.2 Mounting the camera
1. Mount a lens to the camera.
Select a lens based on the target size and the distance between the lens and
the target. See the next page.
2. Secure the camera.
Secure the camera using the supplied screws and plastic fitting.
Provide insulation upon mounting. Otherwise, the camera may suffer internal
damage.
CAUTION
Lens
Included screws
(M3 x 6) and
washers
Plastic fitting
M3 screw holes
The plastic fitting has three screw holes;
1. Screw holes for tripod (1/4-20 UNC),
2. M3 screw holes, 3. M4 screw holes.
Use the appropriate ones to secure the camera.
2. M3 screw holes
3. M4 screw
holes
1. Screw holes for tripod
(1/4-20 UNC)
Chapter 2 Preparation
9
2
2.1.3 Selecting a lens
Select a lens based on the target distance (field of view: Y) and the distance
between the lens and the target (working distance). Refer to the chart below to
select the lens best suited for your application.
The line between the dots (GG) indicates the range provided by a close-up
adapter. The close-up adapter is placed between the lens and the camera.
I How to read the chart
Using the CV-L16 with a working distance of 400 mm provides a field of view of
approximately 90 mm. Combining the CV-L50 with a 5 mm close-up adapter
provides a field of view of approximately 30 mm. The values in the chart serve
as a guide. Adjustment may be necessary upon mounting.
Y
WD (Working
distance)
CV-L3* CV-L6* CV-L16*
CV-L50*
10000 1000
1000
100
10
100 10 1
1
1
.
5
5
.
0
1
0
1.0
0
.5
1
.5
1
.0
0
.5
1
5
1
0
5
.0
1
.
5
1
.
0 0
.
5
1
5
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
WD: Working distance (mm)
Y
:

F
i
e
l
d

o
f

V
i
e
w

(
m
m
)
*Model of optional lens
Y
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ARE/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
DATA
001216
TOL
H=002500
L=000000
OPTION
SAVE
T= 000034
RAW SCR
Close-up adapter
Chapter 2 Preparation
10
2
Over-scanning type monitor Under-scanning type monitor
CAM1 CAM
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ARE/CO
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
DATA
00121
TOL
H=00250
L=00000
OPTION
SAVE
T=00003
RAW SCR
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ARE/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
DATA
001216
TOL
H=002500
L= 000000
OPTION
SAVE
T= 000034
RAW SCR
Note: When an external monitor is connected, some monitors may not show the
frame of the screen. Although this does not affect measurement, use an under-
scanning type monitor if you need to see right to the corners of the screen.
Chapter 2 Preparation
11
2
2.1.4 Cable connection and wiring
Be sure to turn off the controller before connecting the cables. If you
connect the cables while the controller is turned on, the camera or
peripheral device may be damaged.
The CV-701(P)/751(P) conforms to CE regulations in Europe; however,
please make sure to keep the wiring for the power and the I/O within 30 m.
Otherwise, it will not conform to EN61326-1.
1. Insert the connector for the camera cable.
When using only 1 camera, insert the connector for camera one into the camera
1 slot only.
2. Insert the modular connector for the remote control console cable.
With the CV-751(P), insert the modular connector only when using the optional
remote control console. When using the console, slide the control selector to
the right.
3. Insert the video output terminal (RCA connector) for the monitor cable.
With the CV-751(P), insert the RCA connector only when using an external
monitor.
4. Connect the cable for the power supply unit.
Connect the cable for the 24 VDC power supply unit to the controllers input/
output terminals 1 and 2.
Use a Philips screwdriver to connect the cable to the terminal. Do not turn on
the power until the mounting procedure is complete.
CAUTION
Control selector
Camera 2
Camera 1
Camera 2
Camera 1
Left: When using the panel keys
Right: When using the console
1: DC24V
2: 0 V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Chapter 2 Preparation
12
2
I CV-751(P)
I CV-701(P)
Control selector
Remote control console
(Option: OP-30938)
24 VDC power
supply unit
(Option: KV-U3
or KV-U6W)
Camera 1 (CV-070)
Lens (Option) Camera 2
Monitor
(Option: CV-M30)
Monitor
(Option: CV-M30)
Remote control console
(Accessory)
24 VDC power
supply unit
(Option: KV-U3 or
KV-U6W)
Camera 1
(CV-070)
Lens (Option)
Camera 2
Chapter 2 Preparation
13
2
2.1.5 Checking the connection
1. Turn on the power.
Turn on the connected 24 VDC power supply.
2. Check the monitor.
A raw (unprocessed) screen is displayed.
When two cameras are connected, the image from camera 1 is displayed.
See page 42 to display the image from camera 2.
* A raw screen is a screen that is seen through the camera without any
processing.
3. Adjust the diaphragm and focus of the lens.
1) Turn the diaphragm ring and focus ring to
adjust the diaphragm and focus while
watching the monitor.
2) After the adjustment is complete, secure
the lock screws to lock the rings.
G Diaphragm adjustment
Adjust the diaphragm so that the target can be easily distinguished from the
background.
G Focus adjustment
Adjust the focus until the target contour becomes clear.
Note: Check the following items if nothing appears on the monitor.
Is the proper type of 24 VDC power supply (CV-751(P): 1.4 A, CV-701(P): 700
mA) used? Are the +24 V and 0 V power supply terminals properly con-
nected?
Is the camera cable properly connected?
Are the cables for the remote control console and monitor properly connected?
(with the CV-701(P) only)
Is the lens cap removed?
Is the lens diaphragm opened wide enough?
Is the monitor turned on?
Is the video input terminal for the monitor properly connected?
Diaphragm ring lock screw
Focus ring lock screw
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
T= 000000
RAW SCR
Chapter 2 Preparation
14
2
4. Adjust the monitor. (with the CV-751(P) only)
The monitor for the CV-751(P) is factory-adjusted so that adjustment is unnec-
essary under normal conditions. If you need to make adjustments due to ambi-
ent light or the viewing angle, follow the procedure below.
* The initial setting is for setting all trimmers to the middle position.
1) Adjust the color depth using the COLOR adjustment trimmer.
2) Adjust the hue using the HUE adjustment trimmer.
3) Adjust the brightness using the BRIGHT adjustment trimmer.
5. Adjust the time and date.
The CV-701(P)/751(P) comes standard with a built-in clock function.
The time and date on the clock are used when writing the data on the
CompactFlash memory, etc.
Adjust the time and date using the [CLOCK] on the configuration menu.
See page 149.
Note 1: The secondary battery for backing up the clock function is not factory-
charged.
The battery can be fully charged by applying power to the controller for 24 hours.
Note 2: With the power off, the time between battery recharges is approximately
two months (at a temperature of 25 C (77F)). When it becomes low in capacity,
the date and time are reset to the initial setting. (00 YEAR 01 MON 01 DAY 00 MIN
00 SEC)
COLOR
Deep
HUE
Reddish Greenish
Light
BRIGHT
Dark Bright
Chapter 2 Preparation
15
2
2.2 Illumination
Use illumination for more stable detection.
If you install the CV-701(P)/751(P) in a location with the following conditions,
detection may not be accurate. Change the location or use the specially designed
illuminator.
Locations directly exposed to sunlight
Locations in which the ambient light varies greatly depending on the time of day
Locations in which the illumination level changes according to the movement of
a machine or people
Illuminator
I Ring lamp
Mount the ring lamp around the lens to illuminate the target evenly. The ring lamp
is available as an option. (CV-R11)
Note: The illumination lamp has a recommended service life. When the light
intensity changes, detection errors may result. Replace the lamp before this
problem occurs.
White balance
Adjust the white balance when discoloration occurs in the target image after the
lens and illumination are adjusted.
See page 148.
Ring lamp
Target
Chapter 2 Preparation
16
2
MEMO
MEMO
Chapter 3
Mode Selection
The CV-701(P)/751(P) features five measurement methods called meas-
urement modes.
This section describes the functions and applications of each mode. A list
of applications and modes is provided to help simple mode selection.
3.1 Measurement Modes and Typical Applications ............... 18
3.1.1 ARE/CON (Area continuous) ............................................... 18
3.1.2 INS/TRG (Inspection trigger) ............................................... 19
3.1.3 INS+POS (Inspection position) ........................................... 22
3.1.4 ABS.POS (Absolute position) .............................................. 23
3.1.5 REL.POS Mode................................................................... 25
3.2 Selecting the Measurement Mode by Application ........... 27
Chapter 3 Mode Selection
18
3
3.1 Measurement Modes and Typical Applications
The CV-701(P)/751(P) features five measurement modes: ARE/CON (Area
continuous), INS/TRG (Inspection trigger), INS+POS (Inspection + position),
ABS.POS (Absolute position), and REL.POS (Relative position). This section
gives an overview and describes the typical application of each mode.
3.1.1 ARE/CON (Area continuous)
Use ARE/CON mode to continuously measure the area in the window for se-
lected color data.
See4.4 AREA Mode Basic Settings on page 57 for the setting procedure.
Functions
Extracts the selected color data of the window.
Sets a window and measures the area of the selected color data and the
background color of the window.
Up to eight windows can be drawn for a single program. The measured data
and detection result for each window are output sequentially.
Sample: Detection for the number of pixels
Typical applications
Use the AREA mode for detection of the presence or absence of a target, a
missing target, and for the shape or area of a target.
A B C A B C
Acceptable (3,000 pixels) Unacceptable (2,000 pixels)
Window
Detecting a chip on building
plywood
Checking the application quantity
of the magnetic substance on
magnetic films
Detecting uneven coating on an
optical disk surface
Detecting uneven curtain coating in
the resist process of a PC board
Chapter 3 Mode Selection
19
3
Basic Unit of Area: Pixel
The sensing element CCD of the camera forms a
square grid pattern, and each minute area corresponds
with a pixel. Each pixel recognizes R, G, and B as a 256-
level brightness signal.
AREA mode allows you to set a window on a desired
part of an image on the monitor screen and count the
number of pixels matching the selected color data.
You can detect the area of a target, whether it is small
or large, and the presence or absence of a target.
3.1.2 INS/TRG (Inspection trigger)
Use INS/TRG mode to measure the selected color data in the window at every
trigger input.
See 4.6 INS Mode Basic Settings on page 70 for setting procedure.
Functions
Selects the measurement parameter by the inspection mode.
The following ten inspection mode types can be selected from the inspection
mode.
Setting an inspection mode for each window allows for multiple detections with
one target.
AREA
Detects the presence or absence of a target, whether it is small or large, a missing
target, and the area of a target as with ARE/CON mode.
OUTER (Outer edge)
Measures the distance between the outermost edges in the window.
INNER (Inner edge)
Measures the distance between the innermost edges in the window.
GAP
Measures the distance between the odd-numbered edges and the even-numbered
edges counted from the left (in horizontal scanning) or top (in vertical scanning) of
the window. The maximum, minimum, and average values can be obtained.
Pixel
OUTER measurement
Window
INNER measurement
Window
GAP measurement
Window
Tips
Chapter 3 Mode Selection
20
3
PITCH
Measures the pitch values to obtain the maximum, minimum, and average values.
EDGE NO (Edge count)
Use this mode to count the number of pins.
Counts the number of edges in the window. (Specify the edge with [WH BL] or
[BL WH].)
COUNT
Counts the number of clusters of extracted colors in the window. Up to 256 clusters
can be counted.
POINT (Point sensor)
Detects the presence or absence of the extracted colors of the set point. Up to 8
points can be detected in a window.
STAIN
Use this mode to detect stains and defects. The four types that can be used for a
window: square, circle, ring, and arc.
GRAVITY
Detects the center of gravity and the angle of principal axis (the longitudinal angle)
of a target.
PITCH measurement
Window
1 2 3 4 5 Window
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Presence
Absence
GRAVITY center
Chapter 3 Mode Selection
21
3
Typical applications
Detecting missing products in a
packaging process
AREA
Determines if there are
any products missing in
each carton.
Measuring paper sheet width
OUTER
Measures the width of a
paper sheet with two
cameras after the slitting
process.
Measuring lead pitch
PITCH
Inspects the bend in IC
leads.
Detecting missing cables
EDGE
NO
Counts the number of
cables wired to connec-
tors.
Detecting missing balls of bearings
COUNT
Counts the number of
balls to determine if any
are missing.
Lighting inspection of an LCD
POINT
Inspects unlit segments of
LCD displays.
Chapter 3 Mode Selection
22
3
Detecting the stains or pinholes on
sheet material
STAIN
Detects any stains or
pinholes on sheet mate-
rial.
Detecting the center of gravity of
alignment marks
GRAVITY
Detects the center of
gravity of alignment
marks.
Unit Conversion Function
The CV-701(P)/751(P) processes an image and obtains data with the number of
pixels. For example, measuring a target with an outer size of 3.25 mm may give
65.0 pixels. The unit conversion function converts the number of pixels into other
units such as mm.
See page 137.
3.1.3 INS+POS (Inspection + position)
Use the INS+POS mode to adjust the position and angle of the window. Use this
mode for trigger detection when the INS/TRG mode cant be used because the
position of the target is not constant.
See 4.6 INS Mode Basic Settings on page 70 and 4.9 Position Detection Mode Basic Settings
on page 109 for the setting procedure.
I Position adjustment
Use this function when detection cannot be operated at the same position in a
window because the position of a target is not constant in field operation. Using
the position adjustment function allows the inspection window to adhere to the
motion of targets.
The position adjustment, like the ABS.POS mode, uses either pattern search
or edge detection to recognize the distinctive image and edge of a target.
It then adjusts the inspection window to adhere to the target. This function allows
the CV-701(P)/751(P) to constantly detect the same position of targets regardless
of the movement of targets. Also, the rotation adjustment function allows the CV-
701(P)/751(P) to automatically tilt the inspection window when the target makes a
rotating movement.
65.0
x0.05
3.25
PROG
WINDOW1
COLOR
MEASURE
248,168
378,236
MASK
,
,
DETECT
MEASURE
001329
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
T=000017
RAWSCRN
G
PROG
WINDOW1
COLOR
MEASURE
248,168
378,236
MASK
,
,
DETECT
MEASURE
001329
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
T=000017
RAWSCRN
G
PROG
WINDOW1
COLOR
MEASURE
248,168
378,236
MASK
,
,
DETECT
MEASURE
001329
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
T=000017
RAWSCRN
G
Position adjustment
window
Without position
adjustment
With position
adjustment
REG SCR
(Registered screen)
Inspection window
(Edge pitch)
Tips
Chapter 3 Mode Selection
23
3
Functions
Inspects every trigger input.
Inspection functions are similar to those of INS/TRG mode.
The position adjustment function is the same as ABS.POS.
Typical applications
Use this mode when the position of a target is not constant for applications de-
scribed in the INS/TRG section.
See page 21.
3.1.4 ABS.POS (Absolute position)
Use the ABS.POS mode to detect the position and angle of the target, and judge
the result with the position adjustment function.
See 4.9 Position Detection Mode Basic Settings on page 109 for the setting procedures.
Functions
Detects the position and angle of a target.
Pattern search and edge detection can be selected for the measurement
mode.
Detects up to four windows, which can be drawn to measure the position of four
points simultaneously.
The judgment, coordinates, angle, and correlation ratio can be output.
The camera can be set to trigger mode only.
I Position detection method
Pattern Search
Register a screen as a reference that includes the position of the pattern to be
searched, and save the pattern to the pattern window. The saved pattern window
is searched through the arbitrary-set search window from the upper-left corner to
the lower-right corner for the position of the most similar pattern.
Reference
image Detection Search
Registered
image
Pattern window
Search window
Chapter 3 Mode Selection
24
3
Edge Detection
Register a screen as a reference that includes the position of the pattern to be
searched, and register an X window and Y window as illustrated. The windows
are searched for points to show a change in color to be recognized as the edge,
and then the X- and Y- coordinates of the edge are detected. Position detection
of the X-coordinate alone using the X window is also available.
Typical application
PROG
WINDOW1
COLOR
MEASURE
248,168
378,236
MASK
,
,
DETECT
MEASURE
001329
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
T=000017
RAWSCRN
G
PROG
WINDOW1
COLOR
MEASURE
248,168
378,236
MASK
,
,
DETECT
MEASURE
001329
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
T=000017
RAWSCRN
G
Y window
Edge
X-window
Edge
Detecting the misalignment of an IC
chip to lead frames
Positioning of a PC board
Controlling robotic handling Positioning of glass substrate
Presswork
Chapter 3 Mode Selection
25
3
3.1.5 REL.POS Mode
Use the REL.POS mode to detect the position and angle of two or more targets,
and judge the result with the position adjustment function.
See 4.9 Position Detection Mode Basic Settings on page 109 for the setting procedures.
Functions
Detects the position of two of more targets, measures the distance between the
two points, and judges the result.
Pattern search and edge detection can be selected for the measurement
mode.
The relative distance between up to three measurement windows and one
reference window can be measured simultaneously.
The positions of the search window, pattern window (when pattern search is
used), and X/Y windows (when edge search is used) are adjusted (X, Y, and )
according to the detection result of the reference window position.
The judgment, coordinates, angle, and correlation ratio can be output.
The camera can be set to trigger mode only.
Typical applications
X-coordinate
Y
-
c
o
o
r
d
i
n
a
t
e
Detecting misaligned labels and
loose caps
Detects simultaneously the position
and angle of labels and loose caps.
Detecting the relative position of a
PC board and IC
Detects the correlation between the
edge of a PC board and IC
Chapter 3 Mode Selection
26
3
Detecting electrodes of lithium-ion
batteries
Detects the position of an electrode
using the edge of the battery as the
reference.
Detecting the molding position of
laminated film
Detects the molding and width of
laminated films using two X-edges.
Use REL.POS mode to measure the relative position of [REF WND] and [REL 1/2/3].
Use REF WIND to detect the rotation angle. WIND1/2/3 will be tilted by the amount
of the angle deviation for detection.
WIND2
REF WIND
WIND2 rotates in conjunction
with REF WIND.
Tips
Use [REL.POS] mode to measure the
relative position of [REF WND] and
[REL_1/2/3].
Chapter 3 Mode Selection
27
3
Inspection item
Presence/absence
detection
(e.g. stains, defects)
Check point
Measurement mode
Area detection
(e.g. missing print)
Position detection
(e.g. misaligned labels)
The target is a long sheet.
The target is an individual
product.
The target position is
constant.
The target position is not
constant.
The reference point is
fixed.
The reference point is not
fixed.
Continuous
detection
Individual
detection
No position
adjustment
Position
adjustment
Absolute
position
Relative
position
ARE/CON
INS/TRG (AREA)
INS+POS (AREA)
ABS.POS
Select either pattern search
or edge detection.
See page 118.
REL.POS
Select either pattern search
or edge detection.
See page 124.
3.2 Selecting the Measurement Mode by Application
Inspection items and checkpoints are listed below. Refer to the following chart to
select the measurement mode best suited for your application.
Chapter 3 Mode Selection
28
3
Inspection item
Check point
Measurement mode
Dimensional measurement
(e.g. bend in pins)
Angle detection
(e.g. dial indication)
Edge counting
(e.g. number of connector
pins)
The target position is
constant.
The target position is not
constant.
The target position is
constant.
The target position is not
constant.
No position
adjustment
Position
adjustment
No position
adjustment
Position
adjustment
INS/TRG
Select from the following
modes.
See page 70 for details.
OUTER
INNER
PITCH
GAP
INS+POS
Select from the following
modes.
See page 106 for details.
OUTER
INNER
PITCH
GAP
ABS.POS
(Angle adjustment)
INS/TRG
(EDGE NO)
INS+POS
(EDGE NO)
Chapter 3 Mode Selection
29
3
Inspection item
Check point
Measurement mode
Counting
(e.g. number of bearing
balls)
Presence/absence of
multiple points
(e.g. lighting inspection of
an LED)
Presence/absence of
defects or stains
(e.g. black spot on resin
caps)
Gravity detection
(e.g. alignment marks of a
PC board)
The target position is
constant.
The target position is not
constant.
The target position is
constant.
The target position is not
constant.
The target position is
constant.
The target position is not
constant.
The target position is
constant.
The target position is not
constant.
No position
adjustment
Position
adjustment
No position
adjustment
Position
adjustment
No position
adjustment
Position
adjustment
No position
adjustment
Position
adjustment
INS/TRG
(COUNT)
INS+POS
(COUNT)
INS/TRG
(POINT sensor)
INS+POS
(POINT sensor)
INS/TRG
(STAIN)
INS+POS
(STAIN)
INS/TRG
(GRAVITY)
INS+POS
(GRAVITY)
Chapter 3 Mode Selection
30
3
MEMO
Chapter 4
Setting Procedure
This section describes how to use the panel keys or the remote control console to
set the CV-701(P)/751(P). It covers everything from basic settings to the advanced
settings.
4.1 Names and Functions of Control Keys and
Monitor Screen .......................................................................... 32
4.2 Preparations......................................................................... 35
4.3 Basic Settings ...................................................................... 36
4.4 AREA Mode Basic Settings ............................................. 57
4.5 AREA Mode Advanced Settings ..................................... 65
4.6 INS Mode Basic Settings ................................................. 70
4.7 INS Mode Advanced Settings ......................................... 96
4.8 INS+POS Mode Basic Settings ..................................... 106
4.9 Position Detection Mode Basic Settings ..................... 109
4.10 Position Detection Advanced Settings ........................ 118
4.11 Optional Settings .............................................................. 134
4.12 Operation Check of the Setting Status ........................... 140
4.13 Initialization ....................................................................... 142
4.14 Input/Output Operation in PROGRAM Mode .................. 143
4.15 Environmental Settings .................................................... 144
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
32
4
4.1 Names and Functions of Control Keys and Monitor Screen
Set each parameter using the panel keys or the remote control console.
4.1.1 Controller
Panel keys (CV-751(P))
I How to use the cursor keys
The cursor keys include four keys: L, M, , and . Use these keys for the
following purposes.
To move through menu items.
To enter the TOL (tolerance) value.
To move the arrow cursor on the monitor.
To change the size of a window or move a window.
To lock the panel key operation temporarily. (Hold down the and keys
simultaneously for at least 2 seconds to lock the panel keys. Hold them down
again for at least 2 seconds to cancel.
SCREEN
WINDOW
RUN
PROG
PROGRAM No.
ESC
ENT
CLEAR TRIG
POWER
[SCREEN] key
Press this key to select the screen type. The following
five screen types appear sequentially: RAW SCR and
PROCES1/2/3/4. See page 55 for details.
[WINDOW] key
[RUN/PROG] key
Press this key to select either
RUN or PROG mode. The mode
switches with each press.
[PROGRAM No.] keys
Press these keys to change
programs.
[ESC] key
Press this key to exit each
setting.
[Cursor] keys
Press these keys to move a
cursor or change a preset value.
[ENT] key
Press this key to confirm a
setting.
[TRIG] key
Press this key to input a
trigger signal. Hold the key
down for at least 2 seconds
for continuous trigger input.
Press it again to cancel it.
M
M
Move up
Move left Move right
Move down
M
M
[CLEAR] key
Press this key to
clear the setting.
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
33
4
Remote control console (CV-701(P)/751(P))
The remote control console is optional with the CV-751(P). (OP-30938)
I How to use the ENT key
G Press the center of the key
To select a menu item.
To confirm a setting.
G Move the key to the direction of an arrow
The key can be moved up, down, right, left, and diagonally.
Move the key for the following purpose.
To move through menu items.
To enter values such as TOL (tolerance).
To move the arrow cursor on the monitor.
To change the size of a window or to move a window.
ENT
ESCAPE
RUN
PROG
CLEAR
POWER
SCREEN TRIGGER
[ENT] key
Use this key to move the
cursor or to confirm a setting.
[ESCAPE] key
Press this key to exit each
setting.
[SCREEN] key
Press this key to select a screen
type. The following five screen
types appear sequentially:
RAW SCR and PROCES1/2/
3/4.
See page 54 for details.
[Mode selection slide switch]
Slide this switch up or down to
select either RUN or PROG
mode.
[TRIGGER] key
Press this key to input a trigger
signal. Hold this key down for at
least 2 seconds for continuous
trigger input. Press it again to
cancel it.
[CLEAR] key
Press this key to cancel the
setting.
E
N
T
Press
Move up
Move right
Move down
Move left
Tips
ENT
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
34
4
4.1.2 Screen page layout
The cursor position is displayed as highlighted on the menu screen.
The menu screen has a layered structure. Use the following keys to move through
the layers. For the layered structure of menu items, refer to the Parameters
sections for each measurement mode.
G With the panel keys
Use the [ENT] key, [Cursor] keys, and [ESCAPE] key.
G With the remote control console
Use the [ENT] key and [ESCAPE] key.
I Screen page layout
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ARE/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
Image screen
Menu screen
RUN/PROG display
Shows the current
operation mode:
RUN or PROG.
Menu screen
Displayed items vary
depending on the
selected measure-
ment mode.
The menu screen above is displayed when [ARE/CON]
is selected from the [MODE] menu.
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
35
4
4.2 Preparations
This section describes the preparations before settings.
4.2.1 Preparations before settings
Preparations before turning on the power
Check the cable connections.
See page 11.
Preparations for turning on the power
1. Turn on the power.
An unprocessed screen will be displayed on the monitor.
2. Aim the camera at a target and adjust the lens and illumination.
See page 13.
Illumination
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
36
4
4.3 Basic Settings
This section describes the common settings for each mode. Be sure to read all
instructions carefully.
4.3.1 Basic setting procedures
This section describes the setting procedures, basic information for changing
settings, and how to perform the major functions.
Selecting the program number
Select a program number before changing the settings. The CV-701(P)/751(P) can
save up to 16 measurement parameters. Each measurement parameter is called a
Program No.. By saving two or more parameters in advance, selection can be
performed with a shift of program numbers upon target changeover.
To save the previous settings, select an unused program number.
Note: When two cameras are connected, the available program numbers are
limited to 00 through 07.
Use a CompactFlash memory ( page 171) or RS-232C communication function ( page
179) to save more than sixteen sets of parameters to a personal computer.
I Panel keys
Press the PROGRAM number keys to select the program number. Pressing the
L key increases the number, and pressing the M key decreases the number.
I Remote control console
1. Place the cursor on [No.].
SCREEN
WINDOW
RUN
PROG
PROGRAM No.
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
Tips
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
37
4
2. Press the [ENT] key to display the program number selection menu.
3. Move the [ENT] key up or down to place the cursor on the desired
number.
4. Press the [ENT] key to confirm the selection.
A program number with G indicates that the number is already being used.
Selecting the program number can also be done by using the input terminal in RUN
mode.
Setting the measurement mode
The CV-701(P)/751(P) allows you to select a measurement mode best suited for
the application from the following five measurement modes: ARE/CON, INS/
TRG, INS+POS, ABS.POS, and REL.POS. For an overview of each mea-
surement mode, see Mode Selection ( See page 17).
1. Place the cursor on [MODE].
2. Press the [ENT] key to display the mode selection menu.
3. Press the [ENT] key up or down to place the cursor on the desired mode.
PROGRAM
No.00
No.00
No.01
No.02
No.03
No.04
No.05
No.06
No.07
No.08
No.09
No.10
No.11
No.12
No.13
No.14
No.15
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
MODE
ARE/CON
INS/TRG
INS+POS
ABSPOS
RELPOS
Tips
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
38
4
4. Press the [ENT] key to confirm the selection.
The cursor will move onto [SHUTTER].
To change a set measurement mode, place the cursor on Y and press the [ENT] key
when the message <ERASE SETTINGS N/Y> appears on the screen.
Selecting a shutter speed
Select a shutter speed according to the speed of the target movement. When the
screen is too bright or too dark, the brightness of the screen is adjusted by chang-
ing the shutter speed. Select a shutter speed from 11 settings: 1/30 through
1/10000 of a second.
1. Place the cursor on [SHUTTER] and press the [ENT] key to display the
shutter menu.
2. Place the cursor on the desired shutter speed and press the [ENT] key to
confirm the selection.
When the image on the screen is blurred because the target moves too quickly, select a
faster shutter speed.
Be sure to readjust the lens after changing the shutter speed, because the brightness
has been changed.
No.00
MODE
ARE/CON
SHUTTER
No.00
MODE
ARE/CON
SHUTTER
SHUTTER
1/30
1/50
1/60
1/100
1/125
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
1/4000
1/10000
Tips
Tips
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
39
4
Register a screen
Save the image to be registered on the memory. Set measurement parameters
based on the reference image.
1. Place the cursor on [SCRN REG] and press the [ENT] key to display the
camera selection menu.
2. Press the [ENT] key when using only one camera. The message
<REGISTER SCREEN N/Y> appears on the monitor screen. (When two
cameras are connected, select one camera to be registered.)
See page 42.
3. Move the [ENT] key to the right to select Y. To cancel the screen
registration, press the [ENT] key while N is highlighted.
Pressing the [TRIGGER] key while Y is highlighted updates the screen image.
4. Press the [ENT] key. The message <CHANGE POS N/Y> appears on the
screen. Move the [ENT] key to the left to select N, and go to step 5.
When using the position adjustment function in INS+POS or ABS.POS
mode, go to the next step in the bracket.
The position can be changed when using the position adjustment function. If the target
is projected at an angle on the screen, it can be adjusted to the proper position.
In position detection, angle detection or angle adjustment operation, the origin point is
specified with the registered screen. Therefore, adjust the position and angle of the
target on the registered screen to determine the origin point.
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
CAM1
REGISTER SCREEN N / Y
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ARE/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
CAM1
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
CHANGE POS N / Y
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ARE/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
CAM1
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
Tips
Tips
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
40
4
Position and angle setting procedure
1. The position of the target can be changed when the target is projected at
an angle on the screen while the message <CHANGE POS N/Y> appears
on the screen. Move the [ENT] key to the right to select Y. When the
target is projected as straight, select N and press the [ENT] key.
2. When Y is selected, the message <ARROW KEY MOVE> appears on the
screen. You can scroll the screen horizontally or vertically. Adjust the
position and press the [ENT] key.
G With the panel keys
Scroll the screen by pressing the [Cursor] keys.
G With the remote control console
Scroll the screen by moving the [ENT] key.
3. The message <UP/DOWN ROTATE> appears on the screen. Adjust the
angle of the target so that the pattern to be searched is projected as
straight in a horizontal or vertical position, and press the [ENT] key.
G With the panel keys
Adjust the angle by pressing the cursor keys.
[L]: Rotates the target counterclockwise.
[M]: Rotate the target clockwise.
G With the remote control console
Adjust the angle by pressing the [ENT] keys.
[L]: Rotates the target counterclockwise.
[M]: Rotate the target clockwise.
CHANGE POS N / Y
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ARE/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
CAM1
WIND1
INSPECT
AREA
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
ARROW KEY MOVE
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ARE/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
CAM1
WIND1
INSPECT
AREA
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
UP/DOWN ROTATE
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ARE/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
CAM1
WIND1
INSPECT
AREA
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
41
4
4. The message <ARROW KEY MOVE > appears again on the screen. Read-
just the position if necessary.
5. Press the [ESCAPE] key to exit the position change operation.
The message <REGISTER POS N/Y> appears on the screen.
6. Press the [ENT] key. The message <REGISTERING> appears on the
screen. Registration is complete when the message disappears. To cancel
the position change operation, select N and press the [ENT] key to go
back to step 1.
5. Press the [ENT] key. The message <REGISTERING> appears on the
screen, and the image is saved in the memory. When registration is
complete, the screen returns to the main menu.
Select a window number
Set different targets, measurement parameters, and result values for each window.
Select window numbers when measuring two or more points with one measure-
ment mode.
1. Place the cursor on [WIND1] and press the [ENT] key. The window menu
appears.
2. Place the cursor on the desired window number, and press the [ENT] key.
(Window 1 is selected here.) The selected window menu appears.
CHANGE POS N / Y
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ARE/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
CAM1
WIND1
INSPECT
AREA
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
REGISTERING
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ARE/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
CAM1
WIND1
INSPECT
AREA
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
WIND1
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
WIND5
WIND6
WIND7
WIND8
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
42
4
A window number shown with G indicates that the number is already being used.
4.3.2 Using two cameras
Selecting a camera image
When two cameras are connected, the screen registration should be done for
each camera.
Note 1: When two cameras are connected, the available program numbers are
limited to 00 through 07.
Note 2: When the vertical/horizontal split screen (1/2) is selected, both screens of
the two cameras should be registered.
1. Place the cursor on [SCRN REG] and press the [ENT] key.
2. Place the cursor on the camera to be selected, and press the [ENT] key.
Select a window
When two cameras are connected, you can select one of the registered screens
to set a window.
Camera 2
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
CAM1
CAM2
Battery
AA
Camera 1
Battery
AA
Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 1 2 Camera 1/2
Tips
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
43
4
1. Place the cursor on [SEL SCRN] and press the [ENT] key.
2. Place the cursor on one of the four registered screens and press the
[ENT] key.
Note 1: In the INS+POS (Inspection+ position) mode, select the screen that is
used for POS ADJ (Position adjustment) for WIND1 (Window 1). When
CAM12 or CAM1/2 is selected in WIND1, position adjustment is operated
by using the image from Camera 1.
Note 2: In the INS+POS mode, POS ADJ1 uses the image from Camera 1,
and POS ADJ2 uses the image from Camera 2 for position adjustment.
Selecting an Inspection Mode (INS/TRG and INS+POS modes only)
The INS/TRG and INS+POS modes offer 10 inspection modes. You can
select different inspection methods for each window. The inspection method is
referred to as INSPECT mode. ( See page 74 for the menu hierarchy.)
1. Place the cursor on [INSPECT] and press the [ENT] key. The inspection
mode menu appears on the screen.
2. Place the cursor on the inspection mode to be selected, and press the
[ENT] key. The AREA mode is confirmed.
WIND1
SEL SCRN
COLOR
SEL SCRN
CAM1
CAM2
CAM1/2
CAM1I2
WIND1
INSPECT
AREA
INSPECT
AREA
OUTER
INNER
GAP
PITCH
EDGE No
COUNT
POINT
STAIN
GRAVITY
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
44
4
Selecting Colors
The CV-701(P)/751(P) measures registered patterns by measuring the color of
the area.
Define the target objects that are to be measured.
1. Place the cursor on [COLOR] and press the [ENT] key. The menu is
switched to the color setting menu.
Refer to the chart below to select [CLR TYPE] (Color type) if
necessary.
Use this setting when copying color extraction settings of
other windows, or when the color density extraction is not
extracted properly. Place the cursor on the desired color
type and press the [ENT] key. The color type is selected.
* Go to page 49 when selecting this color type.
The color data can easily be set by copying the color data from one window to
another. The processing speed is reduced when, by selecting the already extracted
colors from previous windows, the same color data is used for all windows.
2. Place the cursor on [SELECT] and press the [ENT] key. An arrow cursor
appears on the screen.
Limit the measurement
Before the setting After the setting
<Sample: AREA mode>
CLR TYPE
COLOR
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
WIND5
WIND6
WIND7
WIND8
CLR TYPE
COLOR1
COLOR2
GRAY
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
g n i t t e S n o i t p i r c s e D
R O L O C
. s e d o m T N I O P d n a A E R A h t i w d e y a l p s i D
. n o i s r e v n o c y r a n i b - r o l o c s e s s e c o r P
1 R O L O C
r o l o c e h t s s e c o r p o t r o l o c t e g r a t e h t s t c a r t x E
. s n o i t a r e p o t s o m r o f 1 R O L O C t c e l e S . y t i s n e d
2 R O L O C
y l r e p o r p d e t c a r t x e t o n s i r o l o c e h t f i 2 R O L O C t c e l e S
d n a t e g r a t e h t h t o b n e h W ( . 1 R O L O C h t i w
) . s r o l o c k r a d e r a d n u o r g k c a b
Y A R G
s r o l o c r a l i m i s e r a s t e g r a t e h t n e h w e d o m s i h t t c e l e S
e h t s t r e v n o C . e t i h w d n a k c a l b r o
. s e g a m i c i t a m o r h c o n o m o t n i s s e n k r a d / s s e n t h g i r b
* J D A S O P
. d e t c e l e s s i e d o m " S O P + S N I " n e h w s r a e p p A
n o i t i s o p a n e h w a t a d r o l o c t e s e h t s e i p o C
e h t , t e s t o n s i t i n e h W ( . t e s s i w o d n i w t n e m t s u j d a
) . r o l o c d e r n i n w o h s e r a s e m a n w o d n i w
/ 3 / 2 / 1 D N I W
8 / 7 / 6 / 5 / 4
s i w o d n i w a n e h w a t a d r o l o c t e s e h t s e i p o C
e r a s e m a n w o d n i w e h t , t e s t o n s i t i n e h W ( . d e t c e l e s
) . r o l o c d e r n i n w o h s
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
CLR TYPE
COLOR
SELECT
SEN =5
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
TRG
ZOOM

MOVE
PUSH
SELECT
ESC
END

RAW SCR
Tips
[AREA]
[ABS.POS]
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
45
4
3. Move the arrow to the position of the color to be extracted by using the
[ENT] key.
4. Press the [ENT] key. The highlighted area is extracted. Extend the extrac-
tion area by repeatedly pressing the [ENT] key. To optimize the detection,
repeat the color extraction procedure until the images shown in the
sample below appear.
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
CLR TYPE
COLOR
SELECT
SEN =5
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
TRG
ZOOM
MOVE
PUSH
SELECT
ESC
END

RAW SCR
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
CLR TYPE
COLOR
SELECT
SEN =5
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
TRG
ZOOM
MOVE
PUSH
SELECT
ESC
END

PROCES2
<Sample: AREA mode>
Inspection mode
AREA/POINT mode
Raw image
(COLOR)
Extracted image
(COLOR1)
Extracted image
Raw image
(COLOR2)
Extracted image
Raw image
Extract the color until the desired area of extraction is shown
clearly. The extracted color is shown in colors.
EDGE mode (OUTER/
INNER/PITCH/GAP/
EDGE NO/SEARCH)
Extract the color until the edge (the boundary between the
area of extracted color and the rest) becomes clear. The
extracted color is shown in white.
COUNT/GRAVITY mode
Extract the color until the clusters of extracted colors become
isolated from the background.
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
46
4
(COLOR1)
Extracted image Raw image
(COLOR1)
Extracted image Raw image
Inspection mode
STAIN mode Extract the color until the defects and stains become isolated.
PATT Extract the color until the whole image to be searched
becomes isolated.
* When PROCES2 is displayed (except AREA and POINT modes), the 255th level is shown in
yellow. Be sure that the yellow color is not displayed except in the target area.
When some areas of the target color have not
been extraced, move the cursor to the non-
extracted area and press the [ENT] key.
To go back to the previous step, press the
[CLEAR] key. The extraction procedures go back
to the previous step by the number of times you
press the key (9 times max.).
5. Press the [ESCAPE] key. The cursor returns to [SELECT].
When detecting the same color for two or more windows simultaneously, color data can
easily be set by copying data.
Tips
Tips
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
47
4
I Zoom in on the image
You can zoom in on the image for easy color extraction.
1. Press the [TRIGGER] key upon [SELECT]. The zoom function is enabled.
2. Every time the [ENT] key is pressed upward, the image is zoomed in. Every
time the [ENT] key is pressed downward, the image is zoomed out. Select the
desired image size.
3. Press the [TRIGGER] key. The zoom function is canceled and you can con-
tinue operation with the [SELECT] menu with the selected image size.
Auto Color Extraction
The [AUTO] mode stabilizes the color extraction against the color variation of
targets and the fluctuation of illumination. Setting the [AUTO] function after color
extraction is recommended.
1. Place the cursor on [AUTO] and press the [ENT] key repeatedly. The color
selected with [SELECT] is extracted. To cancel, press [CLEAR]. The
extraction procedures go back to the previous step by the number of
times you press the key (9 times max.).
2. Press the [ESCAPE] key. The cursor returns to [COLOR].
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
CLR TYPE
COLOR
SELECT
SEN =5
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
TRG
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM

RAW SCR
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
CLR TYPE
COLOR
SELECT
SEN =5
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
TRG
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM

RAW SCR
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
CLR TYPE
COLOR
SELECT
SEN =5
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
T=
PROCES2
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
CLR TYPE
COLOR
SELECT
SEN =5
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
T=
PROCES2
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
48
4
Adjust the [SEN] (Color sensitivity)
The range of selection is 0 to 9. (5 is the initial value).
Select the color sensitivity for color extraction with [SELECT].
Smaller numbers indicate higher identifying sensitivity for colors. Color extrac-
tion can be operated in stages with [SELECT].
Larger numbers indicate lower identifying sensitivity for colors. Use this setting
for approximate color extraction when a target has a limited number of colors.
1. Place the cursor on [SEN] in the color menu and press the [ENT] key.
The cursor moves to the number.
2. Select a number with the [ENT] key.
With the panel keys
Press L or M cursor.
With the remote control console
Press the [ENT] key up or down.
Pressing the [ENT] key up increases the number, and pressing the [ENT]
key down reduces the number.
3. Press the [ENT] key.
The [SEN] is confirmed.
Ignore an unwanted extracted color
Set to ignore unwanted colors from the extracted colors.
1. Place the cursor on [IGNORE] and press the [ENT] key.
An arrow cursor appears on the screen.
2. Move the arrow cursor to the unwanted color using the [ENT] key.
SEN = 5
BACK
IGNORE
SEN = 5
BACK
IGNORE
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
CLR TYPE
COLOR
SELECT
SEN =5
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
T=
PROCES2
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
49
4
3. Press the [ENT] key. The color of the arrow-selected area will not be
extracted.
I Clear the color extraction
You can clear the extracted color data and resume the setting from the beginning.
1. Place the cursor on [SELECT] or [AUTO] by using the [ENT] key or
[ESCAPE] key.
2. Hold down the [CLEAR] key for at least two seconds. The message <ERASE
SETTINGS N/Y> appears on the screen.
3. Press the [ENT] key to the right to select Y.
4. Press the [ENT] key. The selected color data is cleared.
Screen coordinates
The monitor screen defines the upper left corner as the reference point and is
composed of more than 240,000 pixels: 508 pixels in the X-axis direction and 480
pixels in the Y-axis direction.
The tolerance and position are presented using pixels as the units.
A pixel is a basic unit in image processing. The length and area are presented in
pixels.
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
CLR TYPE
COLOR
SELECT
SEN =5
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
T=
PROCES2
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
CLR TYPE
COLOR
SELECT
SEN =5
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
TRG
ZOOM

MOVE
PUSH
SELECT
ESC
END

PROCES2
ERASE SETTINGS N/Y
1 2 3
1
2
3
(0, 0) (507,0)
(507,479)
(0,479)
...
.
.
.
X-axis
Y-axis
1 pixel
243,840 pixels
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
50
4
Drawing a window
The measurement range on the screen is called a window. The shape of the
window can be selected from a square (SQR), a circle (CIRC), a free square
(F.SQR), a ring (RING), or an arc (ARC).
The available window shapes vary depending on the measurement mode.
I Setting a window
Set a window by the following procedures. (Description is given with the AREA
mode as a sample.)
1. Place the cursor on [MEASURE] and press the [ENT] key. The window shape
select menu appears.
2. Select a window shape from [SQR] (square), [CIRC] (circle), and [F.SQR] (free
square).
3. Press the [ENT] key. A window appears on the screen. The screen below is the
window when [SQR] is selected.
4. Draw a window. The drawing procedure for each window shape is described in
the following section.
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
SCRN REG
COLOR
DET
MEASURE
200, 200
300, 300
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
Square window
COLOR
DET
MEASURE
MEASURE
SQR
CIRC
F SQR
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
SCRN REG
COLOR
DET
MEASURE
200, 200
300, 300
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
SCRN REG
COLOR
DET
MEASURE
200, 200
300, 300
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
Tips
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
51
4
G Drawing a square [SQR] window
1. With the cursor placed on point A, move it in
the desired direction. Point A moves in this
direction to change the shape or size of the
window.
2. Press the [ENT] key to set the position of
point A.
3. With a cursor placed on point C, move it in
the desired direction. Point C moves in this
direction to change the shape or size of the
window.
4. Press the [ENT] key to set the position of
point C.
5. With the cursor placed on a corner of the
window, move it in the desired direction. The
window moves in this direction. Pressing the
[ENT] key repeats the steps above.
6. After setting the size and position of the
window, press the [ESCAPE] key to complete
the drawing of a window.
G Drawing a circular [CIRC] window
1. With the cursor placed on point A, move it up
or down to move point A in the desired
direction.
2. Press the [ENT] key to set the position of
point A.
3. With the cursor placed inside the window,
move it in the desired direction to move the
window. Pressing the [ENT] key repeats the
steps above.
4. After setting the size and position of the
window, press the [ESCAPE] key to complete
the drawing of the window.
G Drawing a free square [F.SQR] window
1. With the cursor placed on point A, move it in
the desired direction. Point A moves in this
direction to change the shape or size of the
window.
2. Press the [ENT] key to set the position of
point A.
3. Set the positions of points B, C, and D using
the same procedure above.
4. With the cursor placed on the corner of the
window, move it in the desired direction. The
window moves in this direction. Pressing the
[ENT] key repeats the steps above.
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
C
C
C
C
D
D
D
D
A D
B C
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
52
4
5. After setting the size and position of the
window, press the [ESCAPE] to complete the
drawing of the window.
G Drawing a ring [RING] window
This window is available only when STAIN is selected
for the measurement mode.
1. With the cursor placed on point A, move it in the
desired direction. Point A moves in this direction to
change the shape or size of the window.
2. Press the [ENT] key to set the position of point A.
3. With the cursor placed on point B, move it in the
desired direction. Point B moves in this direction to
change the shape or size of the window.
4. Press the [ENT] key to set the position of point B.
5. With the cursor placed inside the window, move it in
the desired direction. The window moves in this
direction. Pressing the [ENT] key repeats the steps
above.
6. After setting the size and position of the window,
press the [ESCAPE] key to complete the drawing of
the window.
G Drawing an arc [ARC] window
This window is available only when STAIN is selected
for the measurement mode.
1. With the cursor placed on point A, move it in the
desired direction. Point A moves in this direction to
change the shape or size of the window.
2. Press the [ENT] key to set the position of point A.
3. With the cursor placed on point B, move it in the
desired direction. Point B moves in this direction to
change the shape or size of the window.
4. Press the [ENT] key to set the position of point B.
5. With the cursor placed inside the window, move it in
the desired direction. The window moves in this
direction. Pressing the [ENT] key repeats the steps
above.
6. After setting the size and position of the window,
press the [ESCAPE] key to complete the drawing of
the window.
B
C D
A
B
B
A
B
A
B
C
A
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
53
4
G Cursor movement by pressing the [ENT] key
Every time the [ENT] key is pressed, the window drawing mode changes as
shown below.
To change the window shape
Selecting SQR, CIRC, F.SQR, RING, or ARC is available only when the window is not
drawn. To change the shape to another selection (square, circle, free square, ring, or arc)
after drawing a window, clear the current window. To clear the current window, place
the cursor on [MEASURE] and hold the [CLEAR] key down for at least two seconds.
The message <ERASE SETTINGS N/Y> appears on the screen. Place the cursor on Y
and press the [ENT] key.
G Window coordinate value display
The coordinate values of a window are displayed with numerical values.
Use the values to check or save the setting.
Square window
Circular window
When drawing a square window
When drawing an arc
When drawing a ring
When drawing a free square
When drawing a circular window
(200,150)
A D
B C(400,300)
MEASURE
200, 150
400, 300
Upper line: Coordinates of
point A (X, Y)
Lower line: Coordinates of
point C (X, Y)
X: X-coordinate of the circle
center
Y: Y-coordinate of the circle
center
R: Radius
MEASURE
X=+00200
Y=+00200
R= 00100
(200,200)
Tips
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
54
4
Free square window
Ring window
Arc window
A (210, 170)
B D
c (210, 290)
(120, 230) (300, 230)
MEASURE
210, 170
120, 230
210, 290
300, 230
1st line: Coordinates of
point A (X, Y)
2nd line: Coordinates of
points B (X, Y)
3rd line: Coordinates of
points C (X, Y)
4th line: Coordinates of
points D (X, Y)
MEASURE
X=+00200
Y=+00200
ER=00100
IR=00050
MEASURE
200, 200
100, 100
250, 150
(200,200)
A
B C
X: X-coordinate of the
circle center
Y: Y-coordinate of the
circle center
ER: Radius of external
circle
IR: Radius of internal circle
1st line: Coordinate of point
C (X, Y)
2nd line: Coordinate of point
A (X, Y)
3rd line: Coordinate of point
B (X, Y)
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
55
4
Screen Selection
There are five types of screens: RAW SCR and PROCES1/2/3/4. Use the
PROCES1/2/3/4 to check the settings or operation.
I Selecting the screen
Every time the [SCREEN] key is pressed, the screen changes to the next type in
sequence.
Some screens may not appear depending on the selected menu.
I AREA and POINT
RAW SCR (raw screen)
PROCES1 (processed screen 1) PROCES2 (processed screen 2)
PROCES3 (processed screen 3) PROCES4 (processed screen 4)
Shows a window frame on a raw screen
SCREEN
WINDOW
RUN
PROG
PROGRAM No.
Converts the whole screen into a color
binary image using the binary level of the
selected window.
Converts the whole screen into a binary
image using the binary level of the
selected window. Colors other than the
extracted color are shown in gray.
Converts the inside of each window
into a binary image using the binary
level of each window respectively. The
area outside the windows is shown in
gray.
Converts only the inside of the se-
lected window into a binary image
using the binary level of each window
respectively. The area outside the
window is shown in gray.
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
56
4
I Other (EDGE, COUNT, STAIN, and GRAVITY)
RAW SCR (raw screen) PROCES1 (processed screen 1)
PROCES2 (processed screen 2) PROCES3 (processed screen 3.
COUNT and GRAVITY modes only)
Display in color density or gray
Display only extracted colors in green
on the gradation screen.
Shows a window frame on a raw
screen.
The 255 levels are shown in yellow on
the gradation display.
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
57
4
4.4 AREA Mode Basic Settings
Set the AREA mode from ARE/CON mode for continuous detection, and select
AREA from INS/TRG for detection using the trigger signal input. This section
describes the basic setting procedures using the ARE/CON (Area continuous)
mode.
4.4.1 AREA mode
I Difference between ARE/CON (Area continuous) and INS/TRG (Inspec-
tion trigger)
ARE/CON detects a target continuously. INS/TRG can be used for area detec-
tion, but it detects a target only when a trigger signal is input. Both modes are set
using the same procedure.
I Resolution of image
The images picked up with the CV-701(P)/751(P) are composed of the primary
colors R (red), G (green), and B (blue), and each color has 256 color levels from 0
through 255. For example, a color with R=200, G=50, B=40 is a reddish color, and
a color with R=150, G=150, B=150 is white. The data of R-G, G-B, and R-B are
obtained based on the R, G, B data, and the area is set for the six parameters to
operate color extraction. The color screen processes an image by 16,770,000
resolutions compared to the monochromatic gray mode that processes colors from
white to black with 256 levels. This color mode enables target differentiations that
cannot be distinguished with a black and white mode.
I Counting pixels
The CV-701(P)/751(P) counts the pixels of extracted colors in the MEASURE
window and displays the number of pixels. You can set a tolerance (upper/lower
limits) for the number of pixels to differentiate targets between acceptable and
unacceptable. This enables detection of the presence or absence of components
and the size of a target.
If the position or angle of the target is not constant on the screen, use the position
adjustment function. Select INS+POS (Inspection + position) in the mode selection.
See Basic Setting Flow on page 107.
R=20
G=55
B=40
R=174
G=10
B=10
RAW SCR
Window
Extracted
color pixel
Pixel
Measured
value: 8
Measured
value: 6
Tips
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
58
4
4.4.2 Initial menu screen
The following menu appears after ARE/CON is selected.
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ARE/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
GGG
Program No.
Up to 16 programs
(Nos. 00 to 15) can
be registered.
Shutter speed
Changes shutter speed.
Window
Sets a window for detection.
Processing time
Displays the processing time
for each screen. (Units: ms)
Detection result
The indicator shows the detection result
for each window (8 windows max.).
The lamp farthest to the left represents
window 1, and the lamp farthest to the
right represents window 8.
G (Green): Within tolerance
G (Red): Out of tolerance
G (White): No detection
: The window has not been determined.
Mode
Allows selection from five
measurement modes.
Screen registration
Registers the image for
setting.
Measured value
Displays the measured value of
the window. (Units: pixels)
Tolerance
Sets the allowable range of the
detection results. (Units: pixels)
Option
Sets the illumination adjustment
SAVE
Saves the settings.
Screen selection
Shows the current screen type.
(Raw screen, Processed screen
1/2/3/4)
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
59
4
4.4.3 Basic setting flow
The AREA mode can be set by the following two procedures.
Select the ARE/CON measurement mode.
Select the AREA inspection mode from the window menu of the INS/TRG
measurement mode.
ARE/CON
Select a program number Page 36 Select a program number to save
the settings to.
Set ARE/CON mode Page 37 Select ARE/CON from the five
measurement modes.
Select a shutter speed Page 38 Select a shutter speed depending
on the speed of movement and
brightness of the target.
Register a screen Page 39 Register a screen to store the
settings.
Select a window number Page 41 Select a window number when
measuring two or more areas.
Set COLOR Page 44 Extract colors of the detection
area.
Set DET Page 61 Select between the detection
color and the background color
for counting the pixels.
Set MEASURE window Page 61 Set the area for measurement.
Set TOL Page 63 Set a tolerance value for
differentiation.
Check the settings Page 63 Check if the data is properly set.
Save the settings Page 64 Save the settings.
For the common settings, refer to 4.3 Basic Settings: Basic setting procedures on page 36.
Saving
data
Common
settings
Mode
setting
Operation
check
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
60
4
Setting parameters
The parameters in bold type are described in the basic setting procedures.
See 4.5 AREA Mode Advanced Settings on page 65 for other parameters.
See Basic Settings on page 36 for the parameters in bold.
I Screen type sequence
Pressing the [SCREEN] key shows the following sequence.
Raw screen
Main menu
No.00
MODE
INS/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
DATA
TOL
H=
L=
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
ARE/CON
INS/TRG
INS+POS
ABS.POS
REL.POS
CAM1
CAM2
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
WIND5
WIND6
WIND7
WIND8
WIND1
SEL SCRN
COLOR
DET
MEASURE
MASK
DATA
TOL
H=
L=
ANALOG
COLOR
BACK
SQR
CIRC
F SQR
SQR
CIRC
F SQR
CLR TYPE
COLOR
SELECT
SEN=5
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
COLOR
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
WIND5
WIND6
WIND7
WIND8
Color menu Window menu
ILLU
Processed
screen 1
Processed
screen 2
Processed
screen 3
Processed
screen 4
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
61
4
Basic setting procedure
1. First follow the Basic setting procedures ( page 36) to set the param-
eters to the color settings.
2. Set [DET] (Detection)
Select whether to count the color pixels (extracted color) in the window or the
background pixels.
1) Place the cursor on [DET] and press the [ENT] key. The detection menu
appears.
2) Select [COLOR] or [BACK] with the cursor.
3) Press the [ENT] key to confirm the selection.
3. Set [MEASURE] (Measurement window)
Specify the range of the image (window) for measurement.
1) Place the cursor on [MEASURE] and press the [ENT] key. The window
selection menu appears.
2) Select the shape of the window from [SQR] (square), [CIRC] (circle), and [F
SQR] (free square).
3) Press the [ENT] key. A frame appears on the screen. The screen below
shows the frame when [SQR] is selected.
WIND1
SEL SCRN
COLOR
DET
MEASURE
MEASURE
SQR
CIRC
F SQR
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
SCRN REG
COLOR
DET
MEASURE
200, 200
300, 300
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
COLOR
DET
MEASURE
DET
COLOR
BACK
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
62
4
4) Move the cursor to enclose the desired area for measurement.
The window drawing mode changes as follows every time the [ENT] key is
pressed.
To change the window shape
Selecting SQR, CIRC, or F SQR is available only when the window is not drawn. To
change the shape to another selection (square, circle, or free square) after drawing the
window, clear the current window.
To clear the current window, place the cursor on [MEASURE] and hold down the
[CLEAR] key for at least two seconds. The message <ERASE SETTINGS N/Y> appears on
the monitor screen. Select Y and press the [ENT] key.
5) After setting the size and position of the window, press the [ESCAPE] key to
exit the [MEASURE] setting.
I Mask window
When a mask window ([MASK]) is overlapped with a measurement window, the
area inside of the mask window is omitted from the measurement.
Draw a mask window using the same procedure as for a measurement window.
MEASURE
MASK
Mask window
[MEASURE] window
Area to be measured
Tips
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
SCRN REG
COLOR
DET
MEASURE
200, 200
300, 300
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
Square window
Free square window
Circular window
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
63
4
4. Set [TOL] (Tolerance)
Set the upper limit H= and the lower limit L= of the tolerance. The units are
pixels. The measured values within the tolerance will be acceptable; the values
outside of the tolerance will be unacceptable.
1) First, set the upper limit.
Place the cursor on [H=000000] under [TOL] and press the [ENT] key. 0
for the first digit is shown highlighted. You can enter a numerical value.
2) Move the cursor left or right to select the digit to be changed.
3) Change the value.
With the panel keys
Press the L cursor key repeatedly.
With the remote control console
Move the [ENT] key up repeatedly. The value increments by one from 0, and
after 9 the second digit is incremented.
When the M cursor key is pressed or the [ENT] key is moved down, the value
decrements by one to 0.
4) Press the [ENT] key to confirm the input value.
5) Place the cursor on [L=000000] (lower limit) under [TOL] and change the
value using the same procedure as for the upper limit.
When you cannot determine the tolerance value, refer to the measurement value
displayed in the Operation check after changing the settings described in the follow-
ing pages.
The upper limit cannot be smaller than the lower limit.
The setting for WIND1 is complete.
You can set up to eight windows for a single program number.
To set several windows, select another window number and repeat the above
procedures.
Operation check after changing the settings
1. Press the [ESCAPE] key to return to the initial menu screen.
When the initial menu screen is displayed, trigger signals are input continuously
and the measured value is displayed.
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
Tips
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
TOL
H=000500
L=000000
DATA
001216 Measured value
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
64
4
2. Check the detection result indicator.
Green: Acceptable (The measured value is within the tolerance range.)
Red: Unacceptable (The measured value is outside of the tolerance range.)
White: No detection (The trigger signal is not input.)
Note 1: When [INS/TRG] (Inspection + position) is selected, the measured value is
displayed at the time of a trigger input. Press the [TRIGGER] key to input the
trigger signal. The detection result indicator is white before the first trigger input.
Note 2: When [ARE/CON] is selected, DATA (Measured value) is retained while
the [TRIGGER] key is pressed.
Use the illumination adjustment function when the measured value is not stable because
of the unstable luminous intensity.
See page 136 for the setting procedure.
Saving the settings
Save the setting data. The following three methods can be used to save the data.
Press the [RUN/PROG] panel key or slide the mode selection slide switch
on the remote control console up.
When the CV-701(P)/751(P) enters [RUN] mode, the message <REGISTER
SET> appears on the screen and the settings are saved in the internal memory.
Select [SAVE] in the menu screen.
When the [ENT] key is pressed, the message <REGISTER SET> appears on
the screen and the settings are saved in the internal memory.
Save the data in CompactFlash memory (Optional)
See Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory on page 171 for the procedure.
Note 1: Do not turn the power off until the message REGISTER SET disappears.
Note 2: If the power is turned off before saving the settings, the setting data will be
lost.
OPTION
SAVE
T=
REGISTER SET
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ARE/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
T=
RAW SCR
Detection result
Tips
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
65
4
4.5 AREA Mode Advanced Settings
4.5.1 AREA/CON menu
AREA menu screen structure
The following is the layered structure of the parameters for the ARE/CONmode.
The details of the parameters in 1. Main menu, 2. Window menu, and 3. Color
menu are explained on the following pages.
1. Main menu
No.00
MODE
INS/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
DATA
TOL
H=
L=
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
ARE/CON
INS/TRG
INS+POS
ABS.POS
REL.POS
CAM1
CAM2
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
WIND5
WIND6
WIND7
WIND8
WIND1
SEL SCRN
COLOR
DET
MEASURE
MASK
DATA
TOL
H=
L=
ANALOG
COLOR
BACK
SQR
RING
F SQR
SQR
RING
F SQR
CLR TYPE
COLOR
SEN=5
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
COLOR
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
WIND5
WIND6
WIND7
WIND8
3. Color menu 2. Window menu
ILLU
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
66
4
Menu parameters
1. Main menu
* indicates the initial setting value.
r e t e m a r a P g n i t t e S n o i t p i r c s e D n o i t c n u F
M A R G O R P 5 1 o t * 0 0
e h t r o f . o N m a r g o r P
g n i t t e s
. o N m a r g o r p e h t e g n a h C
. s g n i t t e s l a r e v e s t e s o t
E D O M
R E T T U H S
0 0 0 0 1 / 1 o t 0 3 / 1
) * 0 6 / 1 (
d e e p s r e t t u h S
r e t t u h s r e t s a f a t c e l e S
a g n i t c e t e d n e h w d e e p s
. t e g r a t g n i v o m - t s a f
G E R N R C S Y / N
e c n e r e f e r e h t r e t s i g e R
. n e e r c s
n i e g a m i t e g r a t a e v a S
. y r o m e m e h t
1 D N I W
u n e m b u s o T
, s l i a t e d e h t r o F (
. ) . 2 o t r e f e r
t n e m e r u s a e m a t e S
a f o r o l o c e h t d n a w o d n i w
. t e g r a t
. n o i t c e t e d r o f s l i a t e d t e S
A T A D y a l p s i d e u l a v d e r u s a e M
d e r u s a e m e h t k c e h C
. e u l a v
L O T
0 0 0 0 0 0 = H
0 0 0 0 0 0 = L
H t i m i l r e p p u e h t t e S
. L t i m i l r e w o l e h t d n a
. a t a d d e r u s a e m e h t t e S
) s l e x i p : s t i n U (
N O I T P O
u n e m b u s o T
, s l i a t e d e h t r o F (
e h t o t r e f e r
e v i t c e p s e r
. ) s n o i t c e s
n o i t a n i m u l l i e h t t e S
. n o i t c n u f t n e m t s u j d a
. s g n i t t e s l a n o i t p o t e S
E V A S . a t a d g n i t t e s e h t e v a S
n i a t a d g n i t t e s e h t e v a S
. y r o m e m e h t
0 0 0 0 0 0 = T y a l p s i d e m i t g n i s s e c o r P
g n i s s e c o r p e h t k c e h C
. e m i t
R C S W A R
* R C S W A R
e g a m i l a u t c a e h T
. a r e m a c e h t y b d e r u t p a c
d e s s e c o r p n u e h t k c e h C
. e g a m i
1 S E C O R P
r o f e g a m i d e s s e c o r P
. n o i t c e t e d
n o i t c e t e d e h t k c e h C
. n o i t i d n o c
2 S E C O R P
r o f e g a m i d e s s e c o r P
. n o i t c e t e d
n o i t c e t e d e h t k c e h C
. n o i t i d n o c
3 S E C O R P
r o f e g a m i d e s s e c o r P
. n o i t c e t e d
n o i t c e t e d e h t k c e h C
. n o i t i d n o c
4 S E C O R P
r o f e g a m i d e s s e c o r P
. n o i t c e t e d
n o i t c e t e d e h t k c e h C
. n o i t i d n o c
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
67
4
2. Window menu
* indicates the initial setting value.
r e t e m a r a P g n i t t e S n o i t p i r c s e D n o i t c n u F
1 D N I W 8 o t * 1 D N I W . o N w o d n i W
. o N w o d n i w e h t e g n a h C
. s w o d n i w l a r e v e s t e s o t
N R C S L E S
* 1 M A C
e g a m i a r e m a c e h t t c e l e S
n e e r c s e h t r o f
. n o i t a r t s i g e r
e r a s a r e m a c o w t n e h W
. d e t c e n n o c
2 M A C
1 M A C |2
2 / 1 M A C
R O L O C
u n e m b u s o T
, s l i a t e d e h t r o F (
. ) . 3 o t r e f e r
e b o t s r o l o c e h t t e S
. d e t c a r t x e
r o f s r o l o c t c a r t x E
. n o i t c e t e d
T E D
* R O L O C
t c e l e s , r o s r u c e h t g n i s U
d e t c a r t x e e b o t s l e x i p e h t
. n e e r c s e h t n o s r o l o c n i
e h t n i s l e x i p t n u o C
. r o l o c d e t c a r t x e
K C A B
t c e l e s , r o s r u c e h t g n i s U
d e t c a r t x e e b o t s l e x i p e h t
e h t n o d n u o r g k c a b e h t n i
. n e e r c s
e h t n i s l e x i p t n u o C
. d n u o r g k c a b
E R U S A E M
R Q S
r o e l c r i c , e r a u q s a w a r D
n o w o d n i w e r a u q s e e r f
. n e e r c s e h t
e b o t e g n a r e h t t e S
. d e r u s a e m
G N I R
R Q S F
K S A M
R Q S
r o e l c r i c , e r a u q s a w a r D
n o w o d n i w e r a u q s e e r f
. n e e r c s e h t
e b o t t o n e g n a r e h t t e S
. d e r u s a e m
G N I R
R Q S F
A T A D y a l p s i d e u l a v d e r u s a e M
d e r u s a e m e h t k c e h C
. e u l a v
L O T
0 0 0 0 0 0 = H
0 0 0 0 0 0 = L
H t i m i l r e p p u e h t t e S
. L t i m i l r e w o l e h t d n a
e g d u j o t e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
d e r u s a e m e h t r e h t e h w
r o e l b a t p e c c a s i e u l a v
. e l b a t p e c c a n u
) s l e x i p : s t i n U (
G O L A N A
H A T A D
H G O L A N A
L A T A D
L G O L A N A
r o f e u l a v g n i l a c s e h t t e S
. t u p t u o g o l a n a
e h t r o f 6 6 1 e g a p e e S
. e r u d e c o r p g n i t t e s
d e r u s a e m e h t t u p t u O
d e r i s e d e h t h t i w e u l a v
. e g a t l o v t u p t u o
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
68
4
3. Color menu
* indicates the initial setting value.
r e t e m a r a P g n i t t e S n o i t p i r c s e D n o i t c n u F
E P Y T R L C
* R O L O C
n o i t c a r t x e r o l o c e h t t c e l e S
. s g n i t t e s
n o i t c a r t x e e h t e g n a h C
e h t y p o c r o s d o h t e m
. s w o d n i w r e h t o f o s g n i t t e s
8 o t 1 D N I W
T C E L E S
e h t n o r o s r u c e h t e v o M
e h t t c e l e s o t n e e r c s
. d e t c a r t x e e b o t s r o l o c
. s r o l o c e h t t c a r t x E
N E S ) * 5 ( 9 o t 0
e h t t e s , r o s r u c e h t g n i s U
e g n a r r o l o c r o f y t i v i t i s n e s
e h t g n i t c e l e s n e h w
. s r o l o c n o i t c a r t x e
o t e g n a r r o l o c e h t e g n a h C
e n o n i d e t c a r t x e e b
. n o i t a r e p o
K C A B
* L B
. r o l o c d n u o r g k c a b e h t t e S
e g a m i d e t c e t e d e h t n e h W
. r a e l c t o n s i
H W
E R O N G I
e b o t t o n s r o l o c t c e l e S
. d e t c a r t x e
m o r f s r o l o c d e t c e l e s t i m O
. d e t c a r t x e e s o h t
O T U A
e h t d n e t x e y l l a c i t a m o t u A
. n o i t c a r t x e r o l o c r o f e g n a r
r o l o c e h t e z i l i b a t S
. n o i t c a r t x e
G E R N R C S Y / N
e c n e r e f e r e h t r e t s i g e R
. e g a m i
n i e g a m i t e g r a t e h t e v a S
. y r o m e m e h t
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
69
4
4.5.2 Advanced color settings
When the color extraction is not shown clearly, follow the procedure below to adjust
the settings.
[BACK] (Background)
Set the background color to white or black for [PROCES1] set by the [PROGRAM]
key. (The initial setting: [BL] (black)).
1. Place the cursor on [BACK] under [COLOR] and press the [ENT] key.
The cursor moves to [BL] or [WH].
2. Move the [ENT] key up or down to select [BL] or [WH].
3. Press the [ENT] key to confirm the selection.
The screen below the [PROCES1] screen with the background of [BL] or [WH].
SEN =5
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
SEN =5
BACK
IGNORE
BACK
BLACK
WHITE
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
SCRN REG
COLOR
DET
MEASURE
MASK
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
SCRN REG
COLOR
DET
MEASURE
MASK
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
[WH] (White) background [BL] (Black) background
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
70
4
4.6 INS Mode Basic Settings
This section describes the basic settings using the INS (Inspection) mode.
4.6.1 INS Mode
In addition to the AREA detection described in the previous section, the INS/
TRG (Inspection trigger) mode offers the following nine measurement modes.
Select the mode according to the application.
G OUTER (Outer edge)
Measures the distance between the outermost edges in the window.
G INNER (Inner edge)
Measures the distance between the innermost edges in the window.
G GAP
Measures the distance between the odd-numbered edges and the even-numbered
edges counted from the left (in horizontal scanning) or top (in vertical scanning) of
the window. The maximum, minimum, and average values can be obtained.
G PITCH
Measures the pitch values to obtain the maximum, minimum, and average values.
OUTER measurement
Window
INNER measurement
Window
GAP measurement
Window
PITCH measurement
Window
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
71
4
Window
1 2 3 4 5
G EDGE NO (Edge count)
Counts the number of edges in the window
An edge is a point at which the brightness changes from bright to dark or from dark to
bright on the color concentration screen.
G COUNT
Counts the number of clusters of extracted colors in the window. Up to 256 clusters
can be counted.
G POINT (Point sensor)
Detects the presence or absence of the extracted colors of the set point. Up to 8
points can be detected in a window.
G STAIN
Detects stains and defects in the window.
G GRAVITY
Detects the center of gravity and the angle of principal axis of a cluster of the
extracted color.
The principal axis is the longitudinal angle of the cluster.
Tips
Presence
Absence
Stain
GRAVITY center
1
2
3
4
5
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
72
4
4.6.2 Initial menu screen
The following menu appears after INS/TRG is selected.
Program No.
Up to 16 programs
(Nos. 00 to 15) can be
registered.
Shutter speed
Changes shutter speed.
Window
Sets a window for detection.
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
INS/TRG
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
INSPECT
AREA
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
GGG
Mode
Allows selection from five
measurement modes.
Screen registration
Registers the image for setting.
Measured value
Displays the measured value of
the window. (Units: pixels)
Tolerance
Sets the allowable range of the
detection results. (Units: pixels)
Option
Sets the stored screen, illumina-
tion adjustment, and data
conversion
SAVE
Saves the settings.
Screen selection
Shows the current screen type.
(Raw screen, Processed screen
1/2/3/4)
Processing time
Displays the processing time
for each screen. (Units: ms)
Detection result
The indicator shows the detection
result for each window (8 windows
max.). The light farthest to the left
represents window 1, and the light
farthest to the right represents
window 8.
G (Green): Within tolerance
G (Red): Outside of tolerance
G (White): No detection
: The window has not been determined.
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
73
4
4.6.3 Basic setting flow
Select a program number Page 36 Select a program number to
save the settings to.
Set INS/TRG mode Page 37 Select INS/TRG from the five
measurement modes.
Select a shutter speed Page 38 Select a shutter speed depend-
ing on the speed of movement
and brightness of the target.
Register a screen Page 39 Register a screen to store the
settings.
Select a window number Page 41 Select a window number when
measuring two or more areas.
Select INSPECT mode Page 43 Select INSPECT mode accord-
ing to the desired inspection
method.
Set COLOR Page 44 Extract colors from the detection
area.
Set MEASURE window Page 76 Set the area for measurement.
Set TOL Page 77 Set a tolerance value for
differentiation.
Check the settings Page 78 Check that the data is properly
set.
Save the settings Page 79 Save the settings.
For common settings, refer to 4.3 Basic Settings: Basic setting procedures on page 36.
Common
settings
Mode
setting
Operation
check
Saving
data
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
74
4
Setting parameters
The parameters in bold type are described in the basic setting procedures.
See 4.7 INS Mode Advanced Settings on page 96 for other parameters.
See Basic Settings on page 36 for the parameters in bold.
I Screen type sequence
Pressing the [SCREEN] key shows the following sequence.
When AREA or COUNT is selected
* When OUTER, INNER, GAP, PITCH, EDGE NO, or STAIN is selected
* When COUNT or GRAVITY is selected
Main menu
No.00
MODE
INS/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
INSPECT
OUTER
DATA
TOL
H=
L=
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
ARE/CON
INS/TRG
INS+POS
ABS.POS
REL.POS
CAM1
CAM2
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
WIND5
WIND6
WIND7
WIND8
SVD SCRN
ILLU
DATA CAL
WIND1
INSPECT
OUTER
SEL SCRN
COLOR
SCAN
MEASURE
EDGE SEN
030
DATA
TOL
H=
L=
ANALOG
AREA
OUTER
INNER
GAP
PITCH
EDGE NO
COUNT
POINT
STAIN
GRAVITY
X
Y
CLR TYPE
COLOR1
SELECT
SEN=5
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
LEVEL
FILT
COLOR1
COLOR2
GRAY
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
WIND5
WIND6
WIND7
WIND8
Color menu Window menu
Processed
screen 4
Raw screen
Processed
screen 1
Processed
screen 2
Processed
screen 3
Raw screen
Processed
screen 1
Processed
screen 2
Raw screen
Processed
screen 1
Processed
screen 2
Processed
screen 3
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
75
4
4.6.4 Basic setting procedure for the measurement mode
You can select a measurement mode best suited for your application from the
following five modes: [OUTER], [INNER], [GAP], [PITCH], and [EDGE NO].
1. First follow the Basic setting procedures ( page 36) to set the
parameters to the color settings.
2. Select the edge type and scanning direction for measurement.
1) Place the cursor on [SCAN] and press the [ENT] key. The [SCAN] menu
appears.
2) Select the scanning direction with the cursor.
[X]: Scan in the horizontal direction on the screen.
[Y]: Scan in the vertical direction on the screen.
3) Press the [ENT] key to confirm the selection.
G When [INSPECT] is set to [EDGE NO]
Place the cursor on [SCAN] and press the [ENT] key. The edge menu appears.
Place the cursor on the desired option and press the [ENT] key.
[BL WH]: Count the edge at which the image changes from dark to bright
when scanned from the left or top of the color screen.
[WH BL]: Count the edge at which the image changes from bright to dark
when scanned from the left or top of the color screen.
COLOR
SCAN
MEASURE
SCAN
X
Y
SCAN
EDGEMODE
MEASURE
EDGEMODE
BLWH
WHBL
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
76
4
3. Set [MEASURE] (Measurement window)
Specify the size of the window used for measurement. (Example: Setting for
OUTER mode)
1) Place the cursor on [MEASURE] and press the [ENT] key. A frame appears
on the screen.
2) Move the cursor to enclose the desired area for measurement.
The window drawing mode changes as shown below every time the [ENT] key
is pressed.
3) After setting the size and position of the window, press the [ESCAPE] key to
exit the [MEASURE] setting.
WIND1
SEL SCRN
COLOR
DET
MEASURE
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
OUTER
SEL SCRN
COLOR
SCAN
MEASURE
100, 220
400, 260
DATA
+0.000
TOL
H=+0.000
L=+0.000
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
OUTER
SEL SCRN
COLOR
SCAN
MEASURE
100, 220
400, 260
DATA
+0.000
TOL
H=+0.000
L=+0.000
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
77
4
4. Set [TOL] (Tolerance)
Set the upper limit H= and the lower limit L= of the tolerance.
1) First, set the upper limit. Place the cursor on [H=0.000] under [TOL] and
press the [ENT] key. The first digit, 0, is shown as highlighted. You can
enter a numerical value.
2) Change the value.
With the panel keys
Press the L cursor key repeatedly.
With the remote control console
Move the [ENT] key up repeatedly. The value increments by one from 0. After
9, the second digit is incremented.
When the M cursor key is pressed or the [ENT] key is moved down, the value
decrements by one to 0.
3) Press the [ENT] key to confirm the input value.
4) Place the cursor on [L=000000] (lower limit) under [TOL] and change the
value for the lower limit using the same procedure as for the upper limit.
When you cannot determine the tolerance value, refer to the measurement value
displayed in Operation check after changing the settings described in the following
pages.
The upper limit cannot be smaller than the lower limit.
The setting for WIND1 is complete.
You can set up to eight windows for a single program number.
To set several windows, select another window number and repeat the above
procedure.
Tips
TOL
H=+0.000
L=+0.000
TOL
H=+0.000
L=+0.000
TOL
H=+0.000
L=+0.000
TOL
H=+150.0
L=+0.000
TOL
H=+150.0
L=+0.000
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
78
4
Operation check after changing the settings
1. Press the [ESCAPE] key to return to the initial menu screen.
2. Press the [TRIGGER] key.
When [INSPECT] mode is set to [OUTER] or [INNER], the screen shows
two lines indicating the detected edges. (The illustration below shows the
screen for [OUTER].)
When [INSPECT] mode is set to [GAP] or [PITCH], the screen shows all
detected edges. (The illustration below shows the screen for [PITCH].)
When [INSPECT] is set to [EDGE NO], the screen shows all detected
edges.
When edge detection is unstable, adjust the detection sensitivity to optimize the detec-
tion. ( See page 100.)
Tips
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
INS/TRG
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
INSPECT
OUTER
DATA
+146.1
TOL
H=+150.0
L=+0.000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
PROCES1
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
INS/TRG
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
INSPECT
PITCH
DATA
Avg+32.90
Max+33.00
Min+32.90
TOL
H=+50.00
L=+0.000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
PROCES1
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
INS/TRG
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
INSPECT
EDGE No
DATA
003
TOL
H= 010
L= 001
OPTION
SAVE
T=
PROCES1
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
79
4
3. Check the detection result indicator.
Green: Acceptable (The measured value is within the tolerance range.)
Red: Unacceptable (The measured value is outside of the tolerance range.)
White: No detection (The trigger signal is not input.)
Saving the settings
Save the setting data. The following three method can be used to save data.
Press the [RUN/PROG] panel key for at least two seconds or slide the
mode selection slide switch on the remote control console up.
When the CV-701(P)/751(P) enters [RUN] mode, the message <REGISTER
SET> appears on the screen and the settings are saved in the internal memory.
Select [SAVE] in the menu screen.
When the [ENT] key is pressed, the message REGISTER SET appears on the
screen and the settings are saved in the internal memory.
Save the data in CompactFlash memory (Optional)
See Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory on page 171 for the procedure.
Note 1: Do not turn the power off until the message REGISTER SET disappears.
Note 2: If the power is turned off before saving the settings, the setting data will be
lost.
Measured value
Detection result
DATA
+103.4
T=
RAW SCR
OPTION
SAVE
T=
REGISTER SET
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
INS/TRG
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
INSPECT
OUTER
DATA
+0.000
TOL
H=+3.410
L=+0.500
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
80
4
4.6.5 Basic setting procedure for COUNT
Count the number of targets in the measured area. One cluster of extracted color is
counted as one target. Measurement is operated for the entire area inside the
window. This section describes the basic setting procedure for the COUNT mode.
1. First follow the Basic setting procedures ( page 36) to set the
parameters to the color settings.
2. Set [MEASURE] (Measurement window)
Specify the size of the window used for measurement.
1) Place the cursor on [MEASURE] and press the [ENT] key. The window
selection menu appears.
2) Select the shape of the window from [SQR] (square) or [CIRC] (circular).
3) Press the [ENT] key. A frame appears on the screen. The screen below
shows the frame when [CIRC] is selected.
4) Move the cursor to enclose the desired area for measurement.
Note: Up to 256 targets can be counted in one MEASURE window. To count more
targets, set two or more windows.
5) The window drawing mode changes as follows every time the [ENT] key is
pressed.
1
2
3 4
5
Circular window
Square window
MEASURE
SQR
CIRC
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
COUNT
SEL SCRN
COLOR
MEASURE
X=+00200
Y=+00200
R= 00100
L= 00000
NUMBER
000
TOL
H= 000
L= 000
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
81
4
To change the window shape
Selecting SQR or CIRC is available only when the window is not drawn. To change the
shape to another selection (square or circle) after drawing the window, clear the current
window. To clear, move cursor to [MEASURE] and hold [CLEAR] key for at least 2
seconds.
6) After setting the size and position of the window, press the [ESCAPE] key to
exit the [MEASURE] setting.
I Mask window
When a mask window ([MASK]) is overlapped with a measurement window, the
area inside of the mask window is omitted from the measurement.
Draw a mask window using the same procedure as for a measurement window.
3. Set [TOL] (Tolerance)
Set the upper limit H= and the lower limit L= of the tolerance. The unit is the
number of targets counted.
1) First, set the upper limit.
Place the cursor on [H=000] under [TOL] and press the [ENT] key. The first
digit, 0, is shown as highlighted. You can enter a numerical value.
2) Move the cursor to the left or right to select the digit to be changed.
3) Change the value.
Tips
[MASK]
window
[MEASURE] window
Area to be measured
MEASURE
MASK
TOL
H= 000
L= 000
TOL
H= 000
L= 000
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
82
4
With the panel keys
Press the L cursor key repeatedly.
With the remote control console
Move the [ENT] key up repeatedly. The value increments by one from 0. After
9, the second digit is incremented.
When the M cursor key is pressed or the [ENT] key is moved down, the value
decrements by one to 0.
4) Press the [ENT] key to confirm the input value.
5) Place the cursor on [L=000] (lower limit) under [TOL], and change the value
for the lower limit using the same procedure as for the upper limit.
The basic setting for the COUNT mode is completed.
Operation check after changing the settings
1. Press the [ESCAPE] key to return to the initial menu screen.
2. Press the [TRIGGER] key.
Cursor for all the counted targets appear on the screen.
You can omit the undesired noise and/or stains in the window from counting by using
AREAFILT (Area filter). ( page 101)
FILTER is also available for the setting. ( page 103)
3. Check the detection result indicator.
Green: Acceptable (The measured value is within the tolerance range.)
Red: Unacceptable (The measured value is outside of the tolerance range.)
White: No detection (The trigger signal is not input.)
Tips
Measured value
Detection result
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
INS/TRG
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
INSPECT
COUNT
NUMBER
008
TOL
H= 009
L= 007
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
TOL
H= 009
L= 007
NUMBER
008
T=
RAW SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
83
4
Saving the settings
Save the setting data. The following three method can be used to save the data.
Press the [RUN/PROG] panel key for at least two seconds or slide the
mode selection slide switch on the remote control console up.
When the CV-701(P)/751(P) enters [RUN] mode, the message <REGISTER
SET> appears on the screen and the settings are saved in the internal memory.
Select [SAVE] on the menu screen.
When the [ENT] key is pressed, the message REGISTER SET appears on the
screen and the settings are saved in the internal memory.
Save the data in CompactFlash memory (Optional)
See Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory on page 171 for the procedure.
Note 1: Do not turn the power off until the message REGISTER SET disappears.
Note 2: If the power is turned off before saving the settings, the setting data will be
lost.
OPTION
SAVE
T=
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
INS/TRG
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
INSPECT
COUNT
NUMBER
000
TOL
H= 009
L= 008
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
REGISTER SET
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
84
4
4.6.6 Basic setting procedure for the POINT (Point sensor) mode
Detects the presence or absence of a target. Judges by the presence or absence
of the extracted color at the set points. Up to eight points can be measured with a
window.
This section describes the basic setting procedure for POINT mode.
1. First follow the Basic setting procedures ( page 36) to set the
parameters to the color settings.
2. Set the size for measurement.
Set the size of the measurement point.
1) Place the cursor on [SIZE]. Select a size best suited for the area to be
detected. Select the size from 4/8/16 pixels.
2) Press the [ENT] key. The size menu appears.
3) Move the cursor to select a desired size and press the [ENT] key to confirm
the selection.
3. Select the measurement points
Set up to eight points to be measured. (Up to 64 points can be measured with
eight windows.)
1) Place the cursor on [POINT].
2) Press the [ENT] key. The SEL POINT (Point selection) menu appears.
A point with G indicates that the point is already being used.
Tips
COLOR
SIZE
POINT
SIZE
4
8
16
COLOR
SIZE
POINT
POINT
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
Present
Extraction color: Red
Absent Present
<Example>
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
85
4
3) Move the cursor to determine a desired point and press the [ENT] key. A
point frame is displayed in red on the screen.
4) Move the point frame to a desired point for detection, and press the [ENT]
key to confirm the setting.
5) Repeat the procedure (steps 3 and 4) to set all points.
4. Set the presence/absence
Set the acceptable/unacceptable judgment from the presence/absence of the
extracted colors within the point frames.
The display farthest to the left indicates the result of P1, and the display farthest
to the right indicates the result of P8.
Present: G Absent: x No detection:
The displays in green indicate that the presence/absence settings match the
result. The displays in red indicate that the settings do not match the result.
1) Place the cursor on [SET] and press the [ENT] key.
The setting parameter for P1 is highlighted, and the setting becomes
available.
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
POINT
SEL SCRN
COLOR
SIZE
POINT P1
138,230
MATCH

SET
o
T=
RAW SCR
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
POINT
SEL SCRN
COLOR
SIZE
POINT P1
138,230
MATCH

SET
oooo
T=
RAW SCR
MATCH
oxox
SET
ooxx
SET
ooxx
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
86
4
2) Move the cursor to select the desired point.
3) Change the setting.
Press the [L]/ [M] panel keys or move the [ENT] key up and down on the
remote control console to change the setting.
4) Press the [ENT] key.
The cursor returns to [SET]. Repeat the above procedure (steps 1 to 3) to
change two or more point settings.
The basic setting for the POINT mode is complete.
Note: The detection result output is an OR output based on the MATCH results of
P1 to P8.
Operation check after changing the settings
1. Press the [ESCAPE] key to return to the initial menu screen.
2. Press the [TRIGGER] key.
[MATCH] displays the measurement result for each point. (Green:
acceptable, Red: unacceptable.)
Change BACK settings (background color) when the color extraction is not shown
clearly. ( page 102)
Saving the settings
Save the setting data. The following three can be used to save the data.
Press the [RUN/PROG] panel key for at least two seconds or slide the
mode selection slide switch on the remote control console up.
When the CV-701(P)/751(P) enters [RUN] mode, the message <REGISTER
SET> appears on the screen and the settings are saved in the internal memory.
Select [SAVE] on the menu screen.
When the [ENT] key is pressed, the message REGISTER SET appears on the
screen and the settings are saved in the internal memory.
Save the data in CompactFlash memory (Optional)
See Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory on page 171 for the procedure.
Note 1: Do not turn the power off until the message REGISTER SET disappears.
Note 2: If the power is turned off before saving the settings, the setting data will be
lost.
SET
ooxx
MATCH
oxox
Tips
OPTION
SAVE
T=
REGISTER SET
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
INS/TRG
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
INSPECT
POINT
MATCH

SET

OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
87
4
4.6.7 Basic setting procedure for the STAIN mode
Use the STAIN mode to detect stains in the window.
Select a window shape from circle, square, circumference, and arc.
1) Set a small area in the window. The small area is called a segment. The
average brightness is measured for each segment. (Change the size of
segments with [SIZE].)
2) Measure all of the segments for brightness differentials between adjacent
segments. The maximum differential in the window is measured.
3) When the measured value exceeds the set level, the stain is judged as
unacceptable (defective).
This section describes the basic setting procedure for the STAIN mode.
1. First follow the Basic setting procedures ( page 36) to set the
parameters to the color settings.
2. Set [MEASURE] (Measurement window)
Specify the size of the window used for measurement.
1) Place the cursor on [MEASURE] and press the [ENT] key. The window
selection menu appears.
2) Select the shape of the window from [SQR] (square), [CIRC] (circle), [RING]
(circumference), and [ARC] (arc).
3) Press the [ENT] key. A frame appears on the screen. The screen below
shows the frame when [CIRC] is selected.
Segment
MEASURE
SQR
CIRC
RING
ARC
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
STAIN
SEL SCRN
COLOR
MEASURE
X=+00200
Y=+00200
R= 00100
LEVEL= 020
NUMBER
000
TOL
H= 000
L= 000
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
88
4
4) Move the cursor to enclose the desired area for measurement.
5) The window drawing mode changes as follows every time the [ENT] key is
pressed.
To change the window shape
Selecting SQR, CIRC, RING or ARC is available only when the window is not drawn. To
change the shape to another selection (square, circle, circumference or arc) after drawing
the window, clear the current window. To clear, move cursor to [MEASURE] and hold
[CLEAR] for at least 2 seconds.
6) After setting the size and position of the window, press the [ESCAPE] key to
exit the [MEASURE] setting.
3. Set the segment size
Select a value to change the sensitivity for stain detection. The smaller values
offer more sensitivity for small stains.
Enhancing the sensitivity extends the processing time and makes it difficult for the system
to respond to high-speed production lines. Eliminate wasted time and select optimal
values.
The size is the area in the measurement window to be detected in sequence.
1) Place the cursor on [SIZE] and press the [ENT] key.
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
STAIN
SEL SCRN
COLOR
MEASURE
X=+00200
Y=+00200
R= 00100
LEVEL= 020
NUMBER
000
TOL
H= 000
L= 000
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
Square window
Arc window
Circumference window
Circular window
Tips
Tips
SIZE 050
LV 020
Smaller Value Greater
Higher Sensitivity Lower
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
89
4
2) Change the values.
Move the cursor keys or the [ENT] key up and down to change the values.
3) Press the [ENT] key to confirm the setting.
4. Select the level
When the measured values exceed the [LEVEL] value, the target is judged as
unacceptable (defective). The measured value is the brightness differential of
the detected areas.
1) Select the upper limit.
Place the cursor on [LV] and press the [ENT] key. The first digit is high-
lighted. You can input a numerical value for the first digit.
2) Move the cursor to select the desired digit.
3) Change the values.
Move the cursor keys or the [ENT] key up and down to change the values.
4) Press the [ENT] key to confirm the LEVEL value.
The basic setting for the [STAIN] mode is completed.
Operation check after changing the settings
1. Press the [ESCAPE] key to return to the initial screen.
2. Press the [TRIGGER] key.
The measurement cursor appears on the area with stains.
When stains and defects are not detected properly, go back to Select the size
( page 88) to readjust the SIZE.
When stains and defects are not extracted properly, use the filter function.
( page 103)
SIZE 050
LV 020
SIZE 030
LV 020
LV 020
LV 020
LV 090
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
STAIN
SEL SCRN
COLOR
MEASURE
SIZE= 050
LEVEL= 020
NUMBER
000
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
Tips
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
90
4
3. Check the detection result indicator.
Green: Acceptable (The measured value is within the tolerance range.)
Red: Unacceptable (The measured value is outside of the tolerance range.)
White: No detection (The trigger signal is not input.)
Saving the settings
Save the setting data. The following three can be used to save the data.
Press the [RUN/PROG] panel key for at least two seconds or slide the
mode selection slide switch on the remote control console up.
When the CV-701(P)/751(P) enters [RUN] mode, the message <REGISTER
SET> appears on the screen and the settings are saved in the internal memory.
Select [SAVE] on the menu screen.
When the [ENT] key is pressed, the message REGISTER SET appears on the
screen and the settings are saved in the internal memory.
Save the data in CompactFlash memory (Optional)
See Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory on page 171 for the procedure.
Note 1: Do not turn the power off until the message REGISTER SET disappears.
Note 2: If the power is turned off before saving the settings, the setting data will be
lost.
DATA
119
T=
RAW SCR
Measured value
Detection result
OPTION
SAVE
T=
REGISTER SET
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
INS/TRG
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
INSPECT
STAIN
LEVEL= 020
NUMBER
000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
91
4
4.6.8 Basic setting procedure for the GRAVITY mode
Use the GRAVITY mode to determine the center of gravity and the angle of
principal axis for the extracted area in the binary-converted image data.
Center of gravity: A point at which the target object is supported to be kept in
balance.
The X-/Y-coordinates of the center of gravity are determined on the screen.
Angle of principal axis: The longitudinal angle () of a target.
Note: According to the operation principles, detection will be unstable under the
following conditions.
When the cluster of extracted colors spreads across the MEASURE window.
When two or more clusters with a similar size exist in the MEASURE window.
When the principal axis is not determined. (e.g. square and circular objects)
This section describes the basic setting procedure for the [GRAVITY] mode.
1. First follow the Basic setting procedures ( page 36) to set the
parameters to the color settings.
2. Set [MEASURE] (Measurement window)
Specify the size of the window used for measurement.
1) Place the cursor on [MEASURE] and press the [ENT] key. The window
selection menu appears.
2) Select the shape of the window from [SQR] (square) and [CIRC] (circular).
Y
X
Y
X

MEASURE
SQR
CIRC
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
92
4
3) Press the [ENT] key. A frame appears on the screen. The screen below
shows the frame when [SQR] is selected.
4) Move the cursor to enclose the desired area for measurement.
5) The window drawing mode changes as follows every time the [ENT] key is
pressed.
To change the window shape
Selecting SQR or CIRC is available only when the window is not drawn. To change the
shape to another selection (square or circular) after drawing the window, clear the
current window. To clear, move cursor to [MEASURE] and hold [CLEAR] for at least 2
seconds.
Note 1: When two or more targets enter the MEASURE window, the target with the
greatest area is measured.
Note 2: Be sure the [MEASURE] window does not come into contact with the
targets.
6) After setting the size and position of the window, press the [ESCAPE] key to
exit the [MEASURE] setting.
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
GRAVITY
SEL SCRN
COLOR
MEASURE
200, 220
300, 300
DATA
X=+0.000
Y=+0.000
ANG=+000
TOL
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
Square window
Circular window
Tips
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
GRAVITY
SEL SCRN
COLOR
MEASURE
200, 220
300, 300
DATA
X=+0.000
Y=+0.000
ANG=+000
TOL
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
93
4
I Mask window
When a mask window ([MASK]) is overlapped with a measurement window, the
area inside of the mask window is omitted from the measurement.
Draw a mask window using the same procedure as for a measurement window.
3. Set the TOL (Tolerance) of the coordinates
Set the allowable range (upper and lower limits) for the X and Y coordinates.
Set the tolerance for each displayed value.
1) Place the cursor on [TOL] and press the [ENT] key. The TOL window
appears.
2) Place the cursor on [X=xxx] under [TOL] and press the [ENT] key. The
value for the first digit is shown as highlighted. You can enter a numerical
value.
3) Press the [L]/[M] cursor keys (panel key) or press the [ENT] key up or down
to change the value.
When the [ENT] key is moved up repeatedly, the value increments by
one from 0. After 9, the second digit is incremented.
The setting range is 99999.
4) Press the [ENT] key to confirm the tolerance value.
4. Set the [TOL] of the angle
Set the allowable range (upper and lower limits) for the angle of the principal
axis (the longitudinal angle of the cluster). The units are degrees.
1) Place the cursor on [TOL] and press the [ENT] key. The TOL window
appears.
Area to be measured
[MASK]
window
[MEASURE] window
MEASURE
MASK
TOL
X=+0.000
=+0.000
Y=+0.000
=+0.000
TOL
X=+0.000
=+0.000
Y=+0.000
=+0.000
TOL
X=+50.00
=+0.000
Y=+10.00
=+0.000
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
94
4
2) Place the cursor on ANG=180 (the upper limit of tolerance for the angle),
and press the [ENT] key. The value for the first digit is shown as highlighted.
You can enter a numerical value.
3) Press the [L]/[M] cursor keys (panel key) or press the [ENT] key up or down
to change the value.
4) Press the [ENT] key to confirm the tolerance value.
5) Set the lower limit of the tolerance for the angle following the same proce-
dure for the upper limit.
The basic setting for the GRAVITY mode is complete.
Operation check after changing the settings
1. Press the [ESCAPE] key to return to the initial menu screen.
2. Press the [TRIGGER] key.
Cross-shaped cursors appear on the center of gravity in the orientation of
the angle of the principal axis.
You can omit the undesired noise and/or stains in the window from counting by using
AREAFILT (Area filter). ( page 101)
FILTER is also available for the setting. ( page 103)
3. Check the detection result indicator.
Green: Acceptable (The measured value is within the tolerance range.)
Red: Unacceptable (The measured value is outside of the tolerance range.)
White: No detection (The trigger signal is not input.)
ANG= 180
= 000
ANG= 180
= 000
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
GRAVITY
SEL SCRN
COLOR
MEASURE
MASK
AREAFILT
DATA
X=+0.000
Y=+0.000
ANG=+000
TOL
X=+50.00
=+0.000
Y=+10.00
=+0.000
ANG=180
=000
T=
RAW SCR
Tips
DATA
X=+10.00
Y=+45.00
T=
RAW SCR
Measured value
Detection result
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
95
4
Saving the settings
Save the setting data. The following three can be used to save the data.
Press the [RUN/PROG] panel key for at least two seconds or slide the
mode selection slide switch on the remote control console up.
When the CV-701(P)/751(P) enters [RUN] mode, the message <REGISTER
SET> appears on the screen and the settings are saved in the internal memory.
Select [SAVE] on the menu screen.
When the [ENT] key is pressed, the message REGISTER SET appears on the
screen and the settings are saved in the internal memory.
Save the data in CompactFlash memory (Optional)
See Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory on page 171 for the procedure.
Note 1: Do not turn the power off until the message REGISTER SET disappears.
Note 2: If the power is turned off before saving the settings, the setting data will be
lost.
OPTION
SAVE
T=
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
INS/TRG
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
INSPECT
GRAVITY
DATA
X=+0.000
Y=+0.000
ANG=+000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
REGISTER SET
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
96
4
4.7 INS Mode Advanced Settings
4.7.1 INS/TRG menu
Menu structure
1. Main menu
No.00
MODE
INS/TRG
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
INSPECT
OUTER
DATA
TOL
H=
L=
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
ARE/CON
INS/TRG
INS+POS
ABS.POS
REL.POS
CAM1
CAM2
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
WIND5
WIND6
WIND7
WIND8
SVD SCRN
ILLU
DATA CAL
WIND1
INS
OUTER
SEL SCRN
COLOR
SCAN
MEASURE
EDGE SEN
030
DATA
TOL
H=
L=
ANALOG
AREA
OUTER
INNER
GAP
PITCH
EDGE NO
COUNT
POINT
STAIN
GRAVITY
X
Y
CLR TYPE
COLOR1
SELECT
SEN=5
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
LEVEL
FILTER
COLOR1
COLOR2
GRAY
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
WIND5
WIND6
WIND7
WIND8
3. Color menu 2. Window menu
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
97
4
1. Main menu
* indicates the initial setting value.
r e t e m a r a P g n i t t e S n o i t p i r c s e D n o i t c n u F
M A R G O R P 5 1 o t * 0 0
e h t r o f . o N m a r g o r P
g n i t t e s
. o N m a r g o r p e h t e g n a h C
. s g n i t t e s l a r e v e s t e s o t
E D O M
R E T T U H S
0 0 0 0 1 / 1 o t 0 3 / 1
) * 0 6 / 1 (
d e e p s r e t t u h S
r e t t u h s r e t s a f a t c e l e S
a g n i t c e t e d n e h w d e e p s
. t e g r a t g n i v o m - t s a f
G E R N R C S Y / N
e c n e r e f e r e h t r e t s i g e R
. n e e r c s
e h t n i e g a m i t e g r a t a e v a S
. y r o m e m
1 D N I W
u n e m b u s o T
r o f . 2 o t r e f e R (
. ) s l i a t e d
t e g r a t , e d o m S N I e h t t e S
n o i t c e t e d d n a , r o l o c
. w o d n i w
. n o i t c e t e d r o f s l i a t e d t e S
T C E P S N I y a l p s i d e d o m S N I
r o f e d o m S N I e h t k c e h C
. w o d n i w d e t c e l e s e h t
A T A D y a l p s i d e u l a v d e r u s a e M
d e r u s a e m e h t k c e h C
. e u l a v
L O T
0 0 0 0 0 0 = H
0 0 0 0 0 0 = L
H t i m i l r e p p u e h t t e S
. L t i m i l r e w o l e h t d n a
. a t a d d e r u s a e m e h t t e S
) s l e x i p : s t i n U (
N O I T P O
u n e m b u s o T
e v i t c e p s e r o t r e f e R (
r o f s n o i t c e s
) . s l i a t e d
n o i t a n i m u l l i e h t t e S
. n o i t c n u f t n e m t s u j d a
. s g n i t t e s l a n o i t p o t e S
E V A S . a t a d g n i t t e s e h t e v a S
n i a t a d g n i t t e s e h t e v a S
. y r o m e m e h t
0 0 0 0 0 0 = T y a l p s i d e m i t g n i s s e c o r P
g n i s s e c o r p e h t k c e h C
. e m i t
R C S W A R
* R C S W A R
d e r u t p a c e g a m i l a u t c a e h T
. a r e m a c e h t y b
d e s s e c o r p n u e h t k c e h C
. e g a m i
1 S E C O R P
r o f e g a m i d e s s e c o r P
. n o i t c e t e d
n o i t c e t e d e h t k c e h C
. n o i t i d n o c
2 S E C O R P
r o f e g a m i d e s s e c o r P
. n o i t c e t e d
n o i t c e t e d e h t k c e h C
. n o i t i d n o c
3 S E C O R P
r o f e g a m i d e s s e c o r P
. n o i t c e t e d
n o i t c e t e d e h t k c e h C
. n o i t i d n o c
4 S E C O R P
r o f e g a m i d e s s e c o r P
. n o i t c e t e d
n o i t c e t e d e h t k c e h C
. n o i t i d n o c
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
98
4
2. Window menu * indicates the initial setting value. **
r e t e m a r a P g n i t t e S n o i t p i r c s e D n o i t c n u F
e d o m ) t c e p s n I ( S N I
1 D N I W 8 o t * 1 D N I W . o N w o d n i W
o t . o N w o d n i w e h t e g n a h C
. s w o d n i w l a r e v e s t e s

N R C S L E S
* 1 M A C
e g a m i a r e m a c e h t t c e l e S
. n o i t a r t s i g e r n e e r c s r o f
e r a s a r e m a c o w t n e h W
. d e t c e n n o c

2 M A C
2 | 1 M A C
2 / 1 M A C
R O L O C
r e f e R ( u n e m b u s o T
. ) s l i a t e d r o f . 3 o t
e b o t s r o l o c e h t t e S
. d e t c a r t x e
. n o i t c e t e d r o f s r o l o c t c a r t x E
T E D
* R O L O C
e h t t c e l e s , r o s r u c e h t h t i W
n i d e t c a r t x e e b o t s l e x i p
. n e e r c s e h t n o s r o l o c
e h t n i s l e x i p t n u o C
. r o l o c d e t c a r t x e

K C A B
e h t t c e l e s , r o s r u c e h t h t i W
e h t n i d e t c a r t x e e b o t s l e x i p
. n e e r c s e h t n o d n u o r g k c a b
e h t n i s l e x i p t n u o C
. d n u o r g k c a b
N A C S
* X
. n o i t c e r i d g n i n n a c s e h t t e S
n o i t c e r i d g n i n n a c s e h t t e S
s i x a - Y r o - X e h t r e h t i e o t
. n o i t c e r i d

Y
N A C S
L B * H W
r o f n o i t c e r i d e h t t c e l e S
. t n e m e r u s a e m
e g d e f o n o i t c e r i d e h t t c e l e S
s s e n t h g i r b a r o f n o i t c e t e d
L B m o r f e g n a h c r o H W
H W . L B

H W L B
E R U S A E M
R Q S
r o , r a l u c r i c , e r a u q s a w a r D
e h t n o w o d n i w e r a u q s e e r f
. n e e r c s
e b o t e g n a r e h t t e S
. d e r u s a e m

C R I C
R Q S F
G N I R
C R A
N E S E G D E 0 0 1 o t 0 0 0
e g d e r o f y t i v i t i s n e s e h t t e S
. n o i t c e t e d
s i n o i t c e t e d e g d e n e h W
. e l b a t s n u

K S A M
R Q S
r o , r a l u c r i c , e r a u q s a w a r D
e h t n o w o d n i w e r a u q s e e r f
. n e e r c s
e b o t t o n e g n a r e h t t e S
. d e r u s a e m

C R I C
R Q S F
T L I F A E R A
5 3 5 5 6 = H
0 0 0 0 0 0 = L
. r e t l i f a e r a n a t e S
e b o t s t e g r a t f o s a e r a t e S
. d e t t i m o

E Z I S 6 1 / 8 / 4
r o f t n i o p a f o e z i s e h t t e S
. t n e m e r u s a e m
r o f s t n i o p f o e z i s e h t t c e l e S
. t n e m e r u s a e m T N I O P

T N I O P 8 P o t 1 P
t n i o p a f o n o i t i s o p e h t t e S
. t n e m e r u s a e m r o f
s t n i o p f o s n o i t i s o p t c e l e S
. t n e m e r u s a e m T N I O P r o f

A T A D y a l p s i d e u l a v d e r u s a e M . e u l a v d e r u s a e m e h t k c e h C
R E B M U N 0 0 0 . y a l p s i d t l u s e r d e r u s a e M
r e b m u n d e t n u o c e h t k c e h C
. e d o m T N U O C e h t h t i w

H C T A M . y a l p s i d t l u s e r d e r u s a e M
t l u s e r d e r u s a e m e h t k c e h C
. e d o m T N I O P e h t h t i w

L O T
0 0 0 0 0 0 = H
0 0 0 0 0 0 = L
, H t i m i l r e p p u e h t t e S
. L t i m i l r e w o l e h t d n a
e g d u j o t e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
d e r u s a e m e h t r e h t e h w
r o e l b a t p e c c a s i e u l a v
. e l b a t p e c c a n u
) s l e x i p : s t i n U (

L E V E L 0 0 0 . n i a t s e h t f o l e v e l e h t t e S
r o f l e v e l n o i t c e t e d e h t t e S
e c n e s b a / e c n e s e r p
. s n i a t s f o n o i t c e t e d

T E S
r o f e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
. e d o m T N I O P
e h t r o f e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
e h t h t i w t l u s e r d e r u s a e m
. e d o m T N I O P

G O L A N A
H A T A D
H G O L A N A
L A T A D
L G O L A N A
r o f e u l a v g n i l a c s e h t t e S
. t u p t u o g o l a n a
e u l a v d e r u s a e m e h t t u p t u O
t u p t u o d e r i s e d e h t h t i w
. e g a t l o v

A
R
E
A
G
R
A
V
I
T
Y
S
T
A
I
N
P
O
I
N
T
C
O
U
N
T
E
D
G
E

N
O
P
I
T
C
H
G
A
P
I
N
N
E
R
O
U
T
E
R
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
99
4
3. Color menu
* indicates the initial setting value.
r e t e m a r a P g n i t t e S n o i t p i r c s e D n o i t c n u F
E P Y T R L C
R O L O C
n o i t c a r t x e r o l o c e h t t c e l e S
. s g n i t t e s
n o i t c a r t x e e h t e g n a h C
e h t y p o c r o s d o h t e m
. s w o d n i w r e h t o f o s g n i t t e s
1 R O L O C
2 R O L O C
Y A R G
8 o t 1 D N I W
2 o t 1 J D A S O P
T C E L E S
e h t n o r o s r u c e h t e v o M
s r o l o c e h t t c e l e s o t n e e r c s
. d e t c a r t x e e b o t
. s r o l o c e h t t c a r t x e o T
N E S ) * 5 ( 9 o t 0
e h t r o f y t i v i t i s n e s e h t t e S
g n i t c e l e s n e h w e g n a r r o l o c
y b s r o l o c n o i t c a r t x e e h t
. r o s r u c e h t g n i s u
o t e g n a r r o l o c e h t e g n a h C
e n o n i d e t c a r t x e e b
. n o i t a r e p o
K C A B
* L B
. r o l o c d n u o r g k c a b e h t t e S
e g a m i d e t c e t e d e h t n e h W
. r a e l c t o n s i
H W
E R O N G I
e b o t t o n s r o l o c t c e l e S
. d e t c a r t x e
m o r f s r o l o c d e t c e l e s t i m O
. d e t c a r t x e e s o h t
O T U A
e h t d n e t x e y l l a c i t a m o t u A
. n o i t c a r t x e r o l o c r o f e g n a r
r o l o c e h t e z i l i b a t S
. n o i t c a r t x e
G E R N R C S Y / N
e c n e r e f e r e h t r e t s i g e R
. e g a m i
n i e g a m i t e g r a t e h t e v a S
. y r o m e m e h t
L E V E L
r o l o c r o f l e v e l a t c e l e S
. n o i t c a r t x e
r o f l e v e l a t c e l e s y l l a u n a M
. n o i t c a r t x e r o l o c
R E T L I F s e p y t 1 1
. r e t l i f a t c e l e S
( r o f 3 0 1 e g a p e e S
. s l i a t e d )
e z i m i t p o r o e s i o n e h t t i m O
. n o i t c e t e d
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
100
4
4.7.2 Sensitivity adjustment for edge detection
Adjust the sensitivity for edge detection
When edge detection is unstable (e.g. some edges are not detected or
unnecessary edges are detected), adjust the sensitivity to optimize detection.
1. Place the cursor on [EDGE SEN] (Edge sensitivity) in the window menu
and press the [ENT] key.
The first digit is shown as highlighted.
2. Move the [ENT] key up or down to change the value for [EDGE SEN].
The change in the value for [EDGE SEN] is reflected in the edge detection
status on the monitor screen. Set the optimal sensitivity while watching the
monitor.
A larger value for [EDGE SEN] decreases the sensitivity, and a smaller
value increases the sensitivity.
MEASURE
EDGE SEN
030
MEASURE
EDGE SEN
030
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
OUTER
SCRN REG
COLOR
SCAN
MEASURE
EDGE SEN
035
DATA
+0.000
TOL
H=+0.000
L=+0.000
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
101
4
4.7.3 Adjustment for the COUNT and GRAVITY modes
Adjusting the [AREAFILT]
When unnecessary areas are detected with the [COUNT] or [GRAVITY] mode,
adjust the area filter to detect only the clusters of desired size.
Select the upper and lower limit for the area filter.
[H=xxx] shows the upper limit, and [L=xxx] shows the lower limit.
1. Set the upper limit.
Place the cursor on [H=xxx] under [AREAFILT] in the window menu, and press
the [ENT] key.
2. The first digit is shown as highlighted. Change the value for the upper
limit of AREAFILT by pressing [L]/[M] cursor keys.
3. Press the [ENT] key to confirm the setting.
Press the [TRIGGER] key after pressing the [ENT] key to check the detection
status. Select the optimal value while watching the monitor.
4. Set the lower limit.
Place the cursor on [L=xxx] and follow the above procedure (1 to 3).
Parameter Description
H=xxx Clusters with a greater number of pixels than H are not counted.
L=xxx Clusters with a smaller number of pixels than L are not counted.
AREAFILT
H= 65535
L= 00100
AREAFILT
H= 65535
L= 00100
AREAFILT
H= 03000
L= 00100
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
102
4
4.7.4 Advanced COLOR setting
When the color extraction is not shown clearly, adjust the setting with the menu as
shown below.
[BACK]
When [PROCES1] is selected with the [SCREEN] key, change the background
color to white or black. (The initial setting is [BL] (Black).)
1. Place the cursor on [BACK] under [COLOR] menu and press the [ENT]
key.
The cursor moves to [BL] or [WH].
2. Press the [ENT] key up or down to select [BL] or [WH].
The screens below are the [PROCES1] screens with a [BL] or [WH] back-
ground.
SEN =5
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
SEN =5
BACK
IGNORE
[PROCES1] with a BL background
BACK
BLACK
WHITE
[PROCES1] with a WH background
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
POINT
SEL SCRN
COLOR
SIZE
POINT P1
138,230
MATCH

SET
o
T=
RAW SCR
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
POINT
SEL SCRN
COLOR
SIZE
POINT P1
138,230
MATCH

SET
o
T=
RAW SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
103
4
4.7.5 Adjusting the color extraction
Using the filter function on the screen
Follow the procedure below to set advance processing (filter) to an image in order
to omit noise on the screen or to optimize detection. Up to two filters can be set,
and processing is operated following the order of selection.
1) Place the cursor on [FILTER] and press the [ENT] key.
2) Press the [L]/[M] cursor keys to select the desired filter.
3) Press the [ENT] key to select a filter function.
* To remove the filter, select the chosen filter to be canceled and press the
[CLEAR] key.
Some combinations cannot be used simultaneously due to the types and
sequence of the filters. One filter cannot be used two or more times.
EXPAND1
EXPAND2
SHRINK
MEDIAN
AVERAGE
EDGE EM
EDGE EX
INVERT
SHADING
INT UP
TINT UP
e p y t r e t l i F n o i t p i r c s e D
1 D N A P X E
l e x i p t s e t h g i r b e h t f o l e v e l e h t o t n i n e e r c s e h t n o l e x i p h c a e s e t a l s n a r T
e z i l i b a t s o t a e r a d e t c a r t x e e h t s d n a p x E . a e r a 3 x 3 g n i d n u o r r u s e h t n i h t i w
. s r e t s u l c d n a s e g d e d e t c e n n o c s i d d n a l l a m s f o g n i s s e c o r p e h t
2 D N A P X E
n o i s n a p x e e h t e t a r e p o o t 2 D N A P X E t c e l e S . 1 D N A P X E s a g n i s s e c o r p e m a S
. e c i w t g n i s s e c o r p
K N I R H S
n i h t i w l e x i p t s e k r a d e h t f o l e v e l e h t o t n i n e e r c s e h t n o l e x i p h c a e s e t a l s n a r T
. e s i o n f o s t n u o m a l l a m s g n i c u d e r n i e v i t c e f f E . a e r a 3 x 3 g n i d n u o r r u s e h t
N A I D E M
l e x i p t s e t h g i r b h t f i f e h t f o l e v e l e h t o t n i n e e r c s e h t n o l e x i p h c a e s e t a l s n a r T
e h t g n i t c e f f a t u o h t i w e s i o n e h t s e c u d e R . a e r a 3 x 3 g n i d n u o r r u s e h t n i h t i w
. e g n a r n o i t c a r t x e e h t f o e z i s
E G A R E V A
n i h t i w l e v e l s s e n t h g i r b e g a r e v a e h t o t n i n e e r c s e h t n o l e x i p h c a e s e t a l s n a r T
m u m i x a m e h t m o r f e g a r e v a e h t s d n i f t i e s u a c e B . a e r a 3 x 3 g n i d n u o r r u s e h t
g n i t a n i m i l e n i e v i t c e f f e e r o m s i t i , l e v e l s s e n t h g i r b e h t f o e u l a v m u m i n i m d n a
. N A I D E M e h t n a h t e s i o n
M E E G D E . e g a m i e h t f o a e r a t h g i r b d n a k r a d e h t n e e w t e b r e d r o b e h t s e z i s a h p m E
X E E G D E . e g a m i e h t f o a e r a t h g i r b d n a k r a d e h t n e e w t e b r e d r o b e h t s y a l p s i d y l n O
T R E V N I . a e r a k r a d d n a t h g i r b e h t s t r e v n I
G N I D A H S . w o d n i w e h t n i y t i s n e t n i s u o n i m u l d e i r a v e h t s t s u j d A
P U T N I . e g a m i e h t f o y t i l i b i s i v e h t t s u j d a o t n e e r c s e h t f o y t i s n e t n i e h t s e s a e r c n I
P U T N I T . e g a m i e h t f o r o l o c e h t n e p r a h s o t n e e r c s e h t f o t n i t e h t s e s a e r c n I
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
104
4
Basic concepts of the filter function
I EXPAND I EDGE EX
I SHRINK I INVERT
I MEDIAN I SHADING
I AVERAGE I INT UP
I EDGE EM I TINT UP
4) When the target colors are varied, for example when setting the [COLOR] for
two or more targets, re-register the screen [SCRN REG] and repeat the color
extraction process described in Basic Settings page 36.
5) Press the [ESCAPE] key to register the color settings.
Note: The color setting interacts with the filter function. When the settings for one
window are copied to another window using the method described on page 44, the
filter type is copied accordingly.
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
CLR TYPE
COLOR1
SELECT
SEN =5
BACK
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
LEVEL
FILTER
T=
RAW SCR
The median
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
105
4
Setting the color extraction level
Do not use this function for normal operation. When the color is not extracted
properly, display the histogram of the screens color data to operate detailed color
extraction.
The level setting function is available when using the color gradation processing
feature.
I LEVEL setting procedure
1. Display the color extraction menu.
2. Place the cursor on [LEVEL] and press the [ENT] key.
The histogram appears.
The horizontal axis represents the color level, and the vertical axis represents the
number of pixels. The distribution of pixels is displayed for each color level.
H is the upper limit and L is the lower limit. Color extraction is operated
between the upper and lower limit. Levels lower than the lower limit are translated
into the lower limit value. Levels higher than the upper limit are translated into the
upper limit value. By setting the H and L to a level with concentrated
distribution, undesired effects (e.g. variation of intensity) are likely to occur.
2 indicates the binary level. The levels above 2 will be converted into green.
3. The setting range for [LEVEL] is shown in blue. Press the [ ]/[ ] cursor
(panel key) or move the [ENT] key to the right and left to select the desired
level.
4. Press the [ENT] key.
The selected level is shown in red.
5. Change the level into the desired level. Press the [ ]/[ ] cursor (panel
key) or move the [ENT] key to the right and left to select the desired level.
6. Press the [ENT] key to confirm the level selection.
The level display returns to blue.
7. Repeat the above procedure (steps 3 to 6) to confirm the other levels.
8. Press the [ESCAPE] key to exit the level setting and return to the color
extraction menu.
LEVEL
FILTER
H: Upper limit
2: Binary level
L: Lower limit
L
L
L
L
LEVEL
FILTER
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
106
4
4.8 INS+POS Mode Basic Settings
This section describes the basic settings before setting the inspection and position
adjustment modes. For details of the inspection mode, refer to 4.6 INS Mode
Basic Settings ( page 70). For details of position adjustment, refer to 4.9 Posi-
tion Detection Mode Basic Settings ( page 109).
4.8.1 Initial menu screen
The following menu appears after INS+POS is selected.
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
INS+POS
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
POS ADJ
WIND1
INSPECT
AREA
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
GGG
Program No.
Up to 16 programs (Nos. 00
to 15) can be registered.
Shutter speed
Changes shutter speed.
POS ADJ
Sets parameters for position
detection.
Window
Sets a window for detection.
Processing time
Displays the processing time
for each screen. (Units: ms)
Mode
Allows selection from five
measurement modes.
Screen registration
Registers the image for
setting.
Measured value
Displays the measured
value of the window.
Tolerance
Sets the allowable range of
the detection results.
Option
Sets the stored screen,
illumination adjustment, and
data conversion
SAVE
Saves the settings
Screen selection
Shows the current screen
type. (Raw screen, Proc-
essed screen 1/2/3/4)
Detection result
The indicator shows the detection
result for each window (8 windows
max.). The light farthest to the left
represents window 1, and the light
farthest to the right represents
window 8.
G (Green): Within tolerance
G (Red): Outside of tolerance
G (White): No detection
: The window has not been determined.
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
107
4
4.8.2 Basic setting flow
Select a program number Page 36 Select a program number to
save the settings to.
Set INS+POS mode Page 37 Select INS+POS from the five
measurement modes.
Select a shutter speed Page 38 Select a shutter speed depend-
ing on the speed of movement
and brightness of the
target.
Register a screen Page 39 Register a screen to store the
settings.
Select a window number Page 41 Select a window number when
measuring two or more areas.
Select INSPECT mode Page 43 Select INSPECT mode accord-
ing to the desired inspection
method.
Set COLOR Page 44 Extract colors of the detection
area.
Set position adjustment Page 109 Refer to page 109 to set the
parameters position adjustment parameters.
Set detection parameters Page 70 Refer to page 70 to set the
detection parameters.
Common
settings
Mode
setting
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
108
4
4.8.3 INS+POS menu
Menu structure
The window menu is similar to the one for the INS/TRG mode.
The POS ADJ menu is similar to the one for the ABS.POS mode.
Main menu
No.00
MODE
INS+POS
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
POS ADJ
WIND1
INSPECT
AREA
DATA
TOL
H=
L=
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
ARE/CON
INS/TRG
INS+POS
ABS.POS
REL.POS
CAM1
CAM2
POS ADJ1
POS ADJ2
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
WIND5
WIND6
WIND7
WIND8
SVD SCRN
ILLU
DATA CAL
When two cameras are connected. page 42
Tips
To ABS.POS window menu. page 118
To INS/TRG menu page 96
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
109
4
4.9 Position Detection Mode Basic Settings
This section describes the basic settings to detect the position of a target using the
ABS.POS (Absolute position) mode. The REL.POS (Relative position) and
INS+POS (Inspection + position) modes are set using the same procedure.
I Pattern search
The pattern search method searches a screen for a stored pattern and measures
its position and angle.
It searches the pattern in horizontal, vertical, or rotating directions within the search
range of the projected image to find the most similar pattern. It then measures its
coordinates. The matching ratio of the detected pattern is displayed as the
correlation ratio.
I Edge detection
Using the edge detection method, two windows are set in the X- and Y-axis
directions independently. The screen is scanned from left to right in the X window
and from top to bottom in the Y window to find the coordinates of the first edge.
You can select the edge to be detected at which the image changes from bright to
dark, or the edge at which the image changes from dark to bright.
Stored image
Search window
Pattern window
Y window
Edge
X window
Edge
PROG
WINDOW1
COLOR
MEASURE
248,168
378,236
MASK
,
,
DETECT
MEASURE
001329
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
T=000017
RAWSCRN
G
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
110
4
4.9.1 Initial menu screen
The following menu appears after the ABS.POS mode is selected.
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ABSPOS
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
INSPECT
PATT
DATA
X=+0.000
Y=+0.000
ANG=+000
FIT= 00
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
GGG
Detection result
The indicator shows the detection
result for each window (4 windows
max.). The light farthest to the left
represents window 1, and the fourth
light from the left represents window 4.
Mode
Allows selection from five
measurement modes.
Screen registration
Registers the image for setting.
Search menu
Displays the current search
menu.
Measured value
Displays the measured value of
the window. (X-/Y-coordinates,
angle, correlation value)
Option
Sets the stored screen, illumi-
nation adjustment, and data
conversion.
Save
Saves the settings.
Screen selection
Shows the current screen type.
(Raw screen, Processed screen
1/2/3)
Program No.
Up to 16 programs (Nos. 00
to 15) can be registered.
Shutter speed
Changes shutter speed.
Window
Sets a window for detection.
Processing time
Displays the processing time
for each screen. (Units: ms)
G (Green): Within tolerance
G (Red): Outside of tolerance
G (White): No detection
: The window has not been determined.
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
111
4
4.9.2 Basic setting flow
Select a program number Page 36 Select a program number to
save the settings to.
Set Position Detection Page 37 Select ABS.POS from the five
mode measurement modes.
Select a shutter speed Page 38 Select a shutter speed depend-
ing on the speed of movement
and brightness of the target.
Register a screen Page 39 Register a screen to store the
settings.
Select a window number Page 41 Select a window number when
measuring two or more areas.
Set COLOR Page 44 Extract colors of the detection
area.
Set MEASURE window Page 113 Set the measurement range.
Set TOL Page 114 Set a tolerance value for differ-
entiation.
Check the settings Page 117 Check that the data is set
properly.
Save the settings Page 117 Save the settings.
For common settings, refer to 4.3 Basic Settings: Basic setting procedures on page 36.
Common
settings
Mode
setting
Operation
check
Saving
data
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
112
4
Setting parameters
The parameters in bold type are described in the basic setting procedures.
See Basic Settings on page 36 for the parameters in bold.
I Screen type sequence
Pressing the [SCREEN] key shows the following sequence.
Basic setting procedure
1. First follow the Basic setting procedures ( page 36) to set the
parameters to the color settings.
2. Set [PW] (pattern window).
Draw a window (range) on the screen to save the pattern of the target on the
screen.
1) Place the cursor on [PW] and press the [ENT] key. A frame appears on the
screen.
Raw screen
Processed
screen 1
Processed
screen 2
COLOR
PW
SW
Main menu
No.00
MODE
ABS.POS
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
MENU
PATT
DATA
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
ARE/CON
INS/TRG
INS+POS
ABS.POS
REL.POS
CAM1
CAM2
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
SVD SCRN
ILLU
DATA CAL
WIND1
MENU
SEL SCRN
COLOR
PW
SW
SRCH SPD
SRCH SEN
ANG ADJ
DATA
TOL
ANG=
FIT=
ANALOG
WIND1
MENU
SEL SCRN
COLOR
EDGEMODE
X
WINDOW X
DATA
TOL
X=
=
Y=
=
ANALOG
CLR TYPE
COLOR1
SELECT
SEN =5
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
LEVEL
FILT
COLOR1
COLOR2
GRAY
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
Color menu Window menu
PATT
EDGE
PATT
EDGE
X
Y
X + Y
X>Y
X<Y
COORD
DEV
Processed
screen 3
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
113
4
2) Adjust the window to fit around the desired pattern to be detected.
The window drawing mode changes as shown below every time the [ENT]
key is pressed.
3) Press the [ESCAPE] key to exit the [PW] setting after setting the range and
position of the window.
Note: When GRAVITY1 or GRAVITY2 is selected under SRCH SEN, the
maximum size of a pattern window is 256 x 256 pixels.
3. Set [SW] (Search window).
Draw a window (range) on the screen to search for the pattern saved in PW.
1) Place the cursor on [SW] and press the [ENT] key. A frame appears on the
screen.
2) Adjust the window to fit around the area in which the selected pattern should
be searched for.
The window drawing mode changes as shown below every time the [ENT]
key is pressed.
3) Press the [ESCAPE] key to exit the [SW] setting after setting the range and
position of the window.
Note 1: The search window is drawn with a red line. The pattern window searches
for the specified pattern within the search window. If a similar pattern exists near
the specified pattern, narrow the search window to avoid detection errors.
Note 2: Narrowing the search window decreases the processing time.
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
SEL SCRN
COLOR
PW
200, 200
300, 300
SRCH SEN
ANG ADJ
0
DATA
X=+0.000
Y=+0.000
ANG=+000
FIT= 00
TOL
ANG=000
FIT= 00
ANALOG
T=000254
RAW SCR
COLOR
PW
SW
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
SEL SCRN
COLOR
PW
SW
SRCH SPD
SRCH SEN
ANG ADJ
0
DATA
X=+0.000
Y=+0.000
ANG=+000
FIT= 00
TOL
ANG=000
FIT= 00
ANALOG
T=000254
RAW SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
114
4
I Window coordinate value display
The window coordinate value is displayed using numerical values. Use the value to
check or save the coordinate values.
4. Adjust the angle.
When position detection uses the pattern search, the angle of the target can be
adjusted as necessary. The adjustable range is 180 maximum.
1) Place the cursor on [ANG ADJ] (Angle adjustment) and press the [ENT] key.
The [ANG ADJ] menu appears on the screen.
2) Place the cursor on the desired angle for adjustment and press the [ENT]
key.
The angle adjustment function is available only when the search menu is set to
[PATT] (pattern).
Increasing the range for angle adjustment increases the processing time. Avoid needless
increases.
5. Set the tolerance of the coordinates.
Set the allowable range (upper and lower limits) for the X and Y coordinates.
The values outside of the range are judged as unacceptable. The setting range
is 99999.
Note: When using the REL.POS (Relative position) setting, the tolerance for
[REF WND] (Reference window) is specified with the absolute values. The toler-
ance for other windows is specified with the difference from the coordinates of
[REF WND].
1) Place the cursor on [TOL] and press the [ENT] key. The [COORD] and
[DEV] selection menu appears.
(200,150)
A D
B C(400,300)
MEASURE
200, 150
400, 300
Upper line: Coordinates of point A (X, Y)
Lower line: Coordinates of point C (X, Y)
SRCH SEN
ANG ADJ
0
ANG ADJ
0
5
10
20
30
45
90
180
Tips
TOL
ANG=000
FIT= 00
TOL
COORD
DEV
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
115
4
[COORD] : Use the median coordinate of the pattern window (X1, Y1) to display
the measured value.
[DEV] : Use the difference from the median coordinate of the reference
pattern window (registered screen) (dX, dY) to display the measured
value.
2) Place the cursor on [COORD] and press the [ENT] key. The cursor moves to
[X=xxx].
3) Press the [ENT] key.
The first digit, 0, is shown as highlighted. You can enter a numerical value.
4) Move the cursor to the left or right and select the digit to be changed.
5) Press the [L]/[M] cursor key (panel key) or move the [ENT] key (remote
control console) up or down repeatedly.
When the [L] cursor key is pressed or the [ENT] key is moved up
repeatedly, the value increments by one from 0. After 9, the second digit
is incremented. The maximum value is 99999. When the [M] cursor key is
pressed or the [ENT] key is moved down repeatedly, the value decrements
by one to 0.
6) Press the [ENT] key to confirm the input value for the upper limit of the X-
coordinate.
7) Move the cursor to the second line and set the lower limit with the same
procedure.
8) Move the cursor to [Y=xxx] and input the upper and lower limits for the Y-
coordinate with the above procedure (steps 2 to 6).
TOL
COORD
X=+0.500
=+0.000
Y=+0.500
=+0.000
TOL
COORD
X=+0.500
=+0.000
Y=+0.500
=+0.000
TOL
COORD
X=+100.0
=+0.000
Y=+0.500
=+0.000
TOL
COORD
X=+100.0
=+0.000
Y=+0.500
=+0.000
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
116
4
Note: The selection menu of [COORD] and [DEV] is displayed only when the
tolerance is not specified. To change the current setting, clear the preset tolerance
value.
To clear the tolerance, place the cursor on [TOL] and hold down the [CLEAR] key
for at least two seconds. When the confirmation message appears, select Y.
6. Set the tolerance of the angle adjustment.
You can set the tolerance for the angle measured by the angle adjustment.
Values outside of the range are judged as unacceptable.
1) Place the cursor on [ANG=] under [TOL] and press the [ENT] key.
2) The value changes to the tolerance value. The first digit is shown as
highlighted. Set the tolerance value with the [ENT] key.
3) Press the [ENT] key to confirm the setting.
When the measured angle is within the tolerance range, the detected result is accept-
able. When the measured angle is outside of the tolerance range, it is unacceptable.
The tolerance is applied to both positive and negative values.
The available values should be within the angle adjustment range.
7. Set the tolerance of the correlation ratio.
Set the tolerance when comparing the matching rate of the saved pattern and
the detected pattern. The correlation ratio is a value that indicates the matching
rate between the saved pattern and the detected pattern. Theoretically, the
value will be 100 if the patterns are identical. A measured value below the
tolerance value is unacceptable. The setting range is 00 to 99.
1) Place the cursor on [FIT=] and press the [ENT] key. The first digit, 0, is
shown as highlighted. You can enter a numerical value.
2) When the [L] cursor key (panel key) is pressed or the [ENT] key (remote
control console) is moved up repeatedly, the value increments by one. After
9, the second digit is incremented. The maximum value is 99. When the
[M] cursor key is pressed or the [ENT] key is moved down repeatedly, the
value decrements by one to 0.
3) Press the [ENT] key to confirm the input value.
The setting of WIND1 is complete. Up to four detection windows can be set
under one program number. To set two or more windows, select a different
window number and repeat the procedure described above.
TOL
ANG=000
FIT= 00
TOL
ANG=000
FIT= 00
Tips
TOL
ANG=000
FIT= 00
TOL
ANG=000
FIT= 00
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
117
4
Operation check after changing the settings
1. Press the [ESCAPE] key to return to the initial menu screen.
2. Press the [TRIGGER] key.
3. Check the detection result indicator.
Green: Acceptable (The measured value is within the tolerance range.)
Red: Unacceptable (The measured value is outside of the tolerance range.)
White: No detection (The trigger signal is not input.)
When detection is not stable, refer to Advanced position adjustment setting.
pages 127 to 129
Saving the settings
Save the setting data. The following three can be used to save the data.
Press the [RUN/PROG] panel key for at least two seconds or slide the
mode selection slide switch on the remote control console up.
When the CV-701(P)/751(P) enters [RUN] mode, the message <REGISTER
SET> appears on the screen and the settings are saved in the internal memory.
Select [SAVE] on the menu screen.
When the [ENT] key is pressed, the message REGISTER SET appears on the
screen and the settings are saved in the internal memory.
Save the data in CompactFlash memory (Optional)
See Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory on page 171 for the procedure.
Note 1: Do not turn the power off until the message REGISTER SET disappears.
Note 2: If the power is turned off before saving the settings, the setting data will be
lost.
DATA
X=+0.000
Y=+0.000
ANG=+000
FIT= 00
T=
RAW SCR
Measured value
Detection result
Tips
OPTION
SAVE
T=
REGISTER SET
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ABSPOS
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
INSPECT
PATT
DATA
X=+0.000
Y=+0.000
ANG=+000
FIT= 00
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
118
4
4.10 Position Detection Advanced Settings
4.10.1 ABS.POS Menu
Menu structure
1. Main menu
No.00
MODE
ABS.POS
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
MENU
PATT
DATA
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
ARE/CON
INS/TRG
INS+POS
ABS.POS
REL.POS
CAM1
CAM2
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
SVD SCRN
ILLU
DATA CAL
WIND1
MENU
SEL SCRN
COLOR
PW
SW
SRCH SPD
SRCH SEN
ANG ADJ
DATA
TOL
ANG=
FIT=
ANALOG
WIND1
MENU
SEL SCRN
COLOR
EDGEMODE
X
WINDOW X
DATA
TOL
X=
=
Y=
=
ANALOG
CLR TYPE
COLOR1
SELECT
SEN=5
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
LEVEL
FILT
COLOR1
COLOR2
GRAY
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
3. Color menu 2. Window menu
PATT
EDGE
PATT
EDGE
X
Y
X + Y
X>Y
X<Y
COORD
DEV
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
119
4
1. Main menu
* indicates the initial setting value.
r e t e m a r a P g n i t t e S n o i t p i r c s e D n o i t c n u F
M A R G O R P 5 1 o t * 0 0
e h t r o f . o N m a r g o r P
g n i t t e s
. o N m a r g o r p e h t e g n a h C
. s g n i t t e s l a r e v e s t e s o t
E D O M
R E T T U H S
0 0 0 0 1 / 1 o t 0 3 / 1
) * 0 6 / 1 (
d e e p s r e t t u h S
r e t t u h s r e t s a f a t c e l e S
a g n i t c e t e d n e h w d e e p s
. t e g r a t g n i v o m - t s a f
G E R N R C S Y / N
e c n e r e f e r e h t r e t s i g e R
. n e e r c s
n i e g a m i t e g r a t a e v a S
. y r o m e m e h t
1 D N I W
u n e m b u s o T
r o f . 2 o t r e f e R (
. ) s l i a t e d
t n e m e r u s a e m a t e S
a f o r o l o c e h t d n a w o d n i w
. t e g r a t
. n o i t c e t e d r o f s l i a t e d t e S
E R U S A E M
e d o m t n e m e r u s a e M
y a l p s i d
t n e m e r u s a e m e h t k c e h C
d e t c e l e s e h t f o e d o m
. w o d n i w
A T A D y a l p s i d e u l a v d e r u s a e M
d e r u s a e m e h t k c e h C
. e u l a v
G N A y a l p s i d e l g n a d e r u s a e M
d e r u s a e m e h t k c e h C
. e l g n a
T I F y a l p s i d o i t a r n o i t a l e r r o C
n o i t a l e r r o c e h t k c e h C
. o i t a r
N O I T P O
u n e m b u s o T
o t r e f e R (
e v i t c e p s e r
r o f s n o i t c e s
. ) s l i a t e d
n o i t a n i m u l l i e h t t e S
, n o i t c n u f t n e m t s u j d a
d n a , n o i s r e v n o c e u l a v
. n e e r c s d e v a s
. s g n i t t e s l a n o i t p o t e S
E V A S . a t a d g n i t t e s e h t e v a S
n i a t a d g n i t t e s e h t e v a S
. y r o m e m e h t
0 0 0 0 0 0 = T y a l p s i d e m i t g n i s s e c o r P
g n i s s e c o r p e h t k c e h C
. e m i t
R C S W A R
* R C S W A R
e g a m i l a u t c a e h T
. a r e m a c e h t y b d e r u t p a c
d e s s e c o r p n u e h t k c e h C
. e g a m i
1 S E C O R P
r o f e g a m i d e s s e c o r P
. n o i t c e t e d
n o i t c e t e d e h t k c e h C
. n o i t i d n o c
2 S E C O R P
r o f e g a m i d e s s e c o r P
. n o i t c e t e d
n o i t c e t e d e h t k c e h C
. n o i t i d n o c
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
120
4
2. Window menu
* indicates the initial setting value.
I Pattern
r e t e m a r a P g n i t t e S n o i t p i r c s e D n o i t c n u F
1 D N I W 4 o t * 1 D N I W . o N w o d n i W
o t . o N w o d n i w e h t e g n a h C
. s w o d n i w l a r e v e s t e s
U N E M
h c r a e S (
) u n e m
* T T A P
. d o h t e m h c r a e s e h t t c e l e S
h c r a e s n r e t t a p e h t e s U
n o i t i s o p r o f d o h t e m
. n o i t c e t e d
E G D E
n o i t c e t e d e g d e e h t e s U
n o i t i s o p r o f d o h t e m
. n o i t c e t e d
N R C S L E S
1 M A C
e g a m i a r e m a c e h t t c e l e S
. n o i t a r t s i g e r n e e r c s r o f
e r a s a r e m a c o w t n e h W
. d e t c e n n o c
2 M A C
2 | 1 M A C
2 / 1 M A C
R O L O C
u n e m b u s o t r e f e R
" u n e M r o l o C " 3
r o f ) 3 2 1 e g a p (
. s e l i a t e d
e b o t s r o l o c e h t t e S
. d e t c a r t x e
r o f s r o l o c t c a r t x E
. n o i t c e t e d
W P
n o i t i s o p d n a e z i s e h t t e S
. w o d n i w n r e t t a p e h t f o
e b o t t e g r a t a t e S
. ) d e t c e t e d ( d e h c r a e s
W S
n o i t i s o p d n a e z i s e h t t e S
. w o d n i w h c r a e s e h t f o
e b o t e g n a r a t e S
. ) d e t c e t e d ( d e h c r a e s
D P S H C R S
T S A F r o d e e p s e h t t e S
. h c r a e s e h t f o n o i t u l o s e r
l e x i p 1 y B : T S A F
l e x i p 1 y B : L A M R O N
l e x i p 1 . 0 y B : X I P B U S
r o d e e p s e h t e g n a h C
. h c r a e s e h t f o n o i t u l o s e r
* L A M R O N
X I P B U S
N E S H C R S
1 Y T I V A R G
e h t f o y t i v i t i s n e s e h t t e S
. h c r a e s
s i h c r a e s e h t n e h W
. e l b a t s n u
2 Y T I V A R G
O T U A
1 E N I F
2 E N I F
J D A G N A
, 0 2 , 0 1 , 5 , 0
, 0 9 , 5 4 , 0 3
0 8 1
e l g n a e h t r o f e g n a r e h t t e S
. t n e m t s u j d a
n o i t c e t e d e l g n a e h t e s u o T
. t n e m t s u j d a e l g n a r o
A T A D y a l p s i d e u l a v d e r u s a e M
d e r u s a e m e h t k c e h C
. e u l a v
G N A . y a l p s i d e l g n a d e r u s a e M
d e r u s a e m e h t k c e h C
. e u l a v
T I F
o i t a r n o i t a l e r r o c d e r u s a e M
. y a l p s i d
d e r u s a e m e h t k c e h C
. e u l a v
L O T
D R O O C
) e t a n i d r o o C (
e t u l o s b a e h t e s U
n e e r c s e h t n o s e t a n i d r o o c
e u l a v l a c i r e m u n e h t s a
. t u p t u o
) n o i t a i v e D ( V E D
e h t m o r f n o i t a i v e d e h t e s U
e h t s a n e e r c s d e r e t s i g e r
. t u p t u o e u l a v l a c i r e m u n
D R O O C
0 0 0 0 = X
e h t r o f e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
X e h t f o e c n a t s i d
. e t a n i d r o o c
X e h t r o f e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
. e t a n i d r o o c
0 0 0 0 =
0 0 0 0 = Y
e h t r o f e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
Y e h t f o e c n a t s i d
. e t a n i d r o o c
Y e h t r o f e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
. e t a n i d r o o c
0 0 0 0 =
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
121
4
r e t e m a r a P g n i t t e S n o i t p i r c s e D n o i t c n u F
G N A
e h t r o f e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
. e l g n a
e h t r o f e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
e l g n a
T I F
e h t r o f e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
. o i t a r n o i t a l e r r o c
e h t r o f e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
. o i t a r n o i t a l e r r o c
G O L A N A
H A T A D
H G O L A N A
L A T A D
L G O L A N A
r o f e u l a v g n i l a c s e h t t e S
. t u p t u o g o l a n a
d e r u s a e m e h t t u p t u O
d e r i s e d e h t h t i w e u l a v
. e g a t l o v t u p t u o
0 0 0 0 0 0 = T y a l p s i d e m i t g n i s s e c o r P
g n i s s e c o r p e h t k c e h C
. e m i t
R C S W A R
* R C S W A R
d e r u t p a c e g a m i l a u t c a e h T
. a r e m a c e h t y b
d e s s e c o r p n u e h t k c e h C
. e g a m i
1 S E C O R P
r o f e g a m i d e s s e c o r P
. n o i t c e t e d
n o i t c e t e d e h t k c e h C
. n o i t i d n o c
2 S E C O R P
r o f e g a m i d e s s e c o r P
. n o i t c e t e d
n o i t c e t e d e h t k c e h C
. n o i t i d n o c
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
122
4
I Edge
* indicates the initial setting value.
r e t e m a r a P g n i t t e S n o i t p i r c s e D n o i t c n u F
1 D N I W 4 o t * 1 D N I W . o N w o d n i W
o t . o N w o d n i w e h t e g n a h C
. s w o d n i w l a r e v e s t e s
U N E M
h c r a e S (
) u n e m
* T T A P
. d o h t e m h c r a e s e h t t c e l e S
h c r a e s n r e t t a p e h t e s U
n o i t i s o p r o f d o h t e m
. n o i t c e t e d
E G D E
n o i t c e t e d e g d e e h t e s U
n o i t i s o p r o f d o h t e m
. n o i t c e t e d
N R C S L E S
1 M A C
e g a m i a r e m a c e h t t c e l e S
. n o i t a r t s i g e r n e e r c s r o f
e r a s a r e m a c o w t n e h W
. d e t c e n n o c
2 M A C
2 | 1 M A C
2 / 1 M A C
R O L O C
u n e m b u s o t r e f e R
" u n e M r o l o C " 3
r o f ) 3 2 1 e g a p (
. s e l i a t e d
e b o t s r o l o c e h t t e S
. d e t c a r t x e
r o f s r o l o c t c a r t x E
. n o i t c e t e d
E D O M E G D E
X
e h t t c e t e d o t e g n a r e h t t e S
s i x a - X e h t n i e g d e
. n o i t c e r i d
n o i t i s o p e h t ) t s u j d a ( t c e t e D
- X e h t n i y l n o n r e t t a p a f o
. n o i t c e r i d s i x a
Y
e h t t c e t e d o t e g n a r e h t t e S
s i x a - Y e h t n i e g d e
. n o i t c e r i d
n o i t i s o p e h t ) t s u j d a ( t c e t e D
- Y e h t n i y l n o n r e t t a p a f o
. n o i t c e r i d s i x a
Y + X
e h t t c e t e d o t e g n a r e h t t e S
d n a - X e h t h t o b n i s e g d e
. s n o i t c e r i d s i x a - Y
n o i t i s o p e h t ) t s u j d a ( t c e t e D
- X e h t h t o b n i n r e t t a p a f o
. s n o i t c e r i d s i x a - Y d n a
Y > X
e h t t c e t e d o t e g n a r e h t t e S
d n a - X e h t h t o b n i s e g d e
. s n o i t c e r i d s i x a - Y
n o i t i s o p e h t ) t s u j d a ( t c e t e D
- X e h t h t o b n i n r e t t a p a f o
y b s n o i t c e r i d s i x a - Y d n a
e h t n i e g d e e h t g n i s u t s r i f
. n o i t c e r i d s i x a - X
X > Y
e h t t c e t e d o t e g n a r e h t t e S
d n a - X e h t h t o b n i s e g d e
. s n o i t c e r i d s i x a - Y
n o i t i s o p e h t ) t s u j d a ( t c e t e D
- X e h t h t o b n i n r e t t a p a f o
y b s n o i t c e r i d s i x a - Y d n a
e h t n i e g d e e h t g n i s u t s r i f
. n o i t c e r i d s i x a - Y
X W O D N I W
D R O O C
N A C S
N E S E G D E
g n i n n a c s , e g n a r e h t t e S
n o i t c e t e d d n a , n o i t c e r i d
X e h t f o y t i v i t i s n e s
. w o d n i w
e h t r o f w o d n i w X e h t t e S
. h c r a e s e g d e
Y W O D N I W
D R O O C
N A C S
N E S E G D E
g n i n n a c s , e g n a r e h t t e S
n o i t c e t e d d n a , n o i t c e r i d
Y e h t f o y t i v i t i s n e s
. w o d n i w
e h t r o f w o d n i w Y e h t t e S
. h c r a e s e g d e
A T A D y a l p s i d e u l a v d e r u s a e M
d e r u s a e m e h t k c e h C
. e u l a v
L O T
D R O O C
) e t a n i d r o o C (
e t u l o s b a e h t e s U
n e e r c s e h t n o s e t a n i d r o o c
e u l a v l a c i r e m u n e h t s a
. t u p t u o
) n o i t a i v e D ( V E D
e h t m o r f n o i t a i v e d e h t e s U
e h t s a n e e r c s d e r e t s i g e r
. t u p t u o e u l a v l a c i r e m u n
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
123
4
3. Color menu
* indicates the initial setting value.
r e t e m a r a P g n i t t e S n o i t p i r c s e D n o i t c n u F
E P Y T R L C
1 R O L O C
n o i t c a r t x e r o l o c e h t t c e l e S
. s g n i t t e s
n o i t c a r t x e e h t e g n a h C
e h t y p o c r o s d o h t e m
. s w o d n i w r e h t o f o s g n i t t e s
2 R O L O C
Y A R G
4 o t 1 D N I W
T C E L E S
e h t n o r o s r u c e h t e v o M
s r o l o c e h t t c e l e s o t n e e r c s
. d e t c a r t x e e b o t
. s r o l o c e h t t c a r t x e o T
N E S ) * 5 ( 9 o t 0
e h t t e s o t r o s r u c e h t e s U
r o l o c e h t r o f y t i v i t i s n e s
e h t g n i t c e l e s n e h w e g n a r
. s r o l o c n o i t c a r t x e
o t e g n a r r o l o c e h t e g n a h C
e n o n i d e t c a r t x e e b
. n o i t a r e p o
E R O N G I
e b o t t o n s r o l o c t c e l e S
. d e t c a r t x e
m o r f s r o l o c d e t c e l e s t i m O
. d e t c a r t x e e s o h t
O T U A
e h t d n e t x e y l l a c i t a m o t u A
. n o i t c a r t x e r o l o c r o f e g n a r
r o l o c e h t e z i l i b a t S
. n o i t c a r t x e
G E R N R C S Y / N
e c n e r e f e r e h t r e t s i g e R
. e g a m i
n i e g a m i t e g r a t e h t e v a S
. y r o m e m e h t
L E V E L
r o l o c r o f l e v e l a t c e l e S
. n o i t c a r t x e
r o f l e v e l a t c e l e s y l l a u n a M
. n o i t c a r t x e r o l o c
R E T L I F s e p y t 1 1
. r e t l i f a t c e l e S
, s l i a t e d r o F : e c n e r e f e R (
) . 1 3 1 e g a p e e s
e z i m i t p o r o e s i o n e h t t i m O
. n o i t c e t e d
r e t e m a r a P g n i t t e S n o i t p i r c s e D n o i t c n u F
D R O O C
0 0 0 0 = X e h t r o f e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
X e h t f o e c n a t s i d
. e t a n i d r o o c
X e h t r o f e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
. e t a n i d r o o c
0 0 0 0 =
0 0 0 0 = Y e h t r o f e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
Y e h t f o e c n a t s i d
. e t a n i d r o o c
Y e h t r o f e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
. e t a n i d r o o c
0 0 0 0 =
G O L A N A
H A T A D
H G O L A N A
L A T A D
L G O L A N A
r o f e u l a v g n i l a c s e h t t e S
. t u p t u o g o l a n a
d e r u s a e m e h t t u p t u O
d e r i s e d e h t h t i w e u l a v
. e g a t l o v t u p t u o
0 0 0 0 0 0 = T y a l p s i d e m i t g n i s s e c o r P
g n i s s e c o r p e h t k c e h C
. e m i t
R C S W A R
* R C S W A R
d e r u t p a c e g a m i l a u t c a e h T
. a r e m a c e h t y b
d e s s e c o r p n u e h t k c e h C
. e g a m i
1 S E C O R P
r o f e g a m i d e s s e c o r P
. n o i t c e t e d
n o i t c e t e d e h t k c e h C
. n o i t i d n o c
2 S E C O R P
r o f e g a m i d e s s e c o r P
. n o i t c e t e d
n o i t c e t e d e h t k c e h C
. n o i t i d n o c
3 S E C O R P
r o f e g a m i d e s s e c o r P
. n o i t c e t e d
n o i t c e t e d e h t k c e h C
. n o i t i d n o c
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
124
4
4.10.2 REL.POS Menu
Menu structure
The parameters of 2 and 3 are the same as the [ABS.POS] menu.
1. Main menu
No.00
MODE
REL.POS
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
REF WND
MENU
PATT
DATA
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
ARE/CON
INS/TRG
INS+POS
ABS.POS
REL.POS
CAM1
CAM2
REF WND
REL1
REL2
REL3
SVD SCRN
ILLU
DATA CAL
REF WND
MENU
SEL SCRN
COLOR
PW
SW
SRCH SPD
SRCH SEN
ANG ADJ
DATA
TOL
ANG=
FIT=
ANALOG
WIND1
MENU
SEL SCRN
COLOR
EDGEMODE
X
WINDOW X
DATA
TOL
COORD
X=
=
Y=
=
ANALOG
CLR TYPE
COLOR1
SELECT
SEN=5
IGNORE
AUTO
SCRN REG
LEVEL
FILTER
COLOR1
COLOR2
GRAY
REF WND
REL 1
REL 2
REL 3
3. Color menu 2. Window menu
PATT
EDGE
PATT
EDGE
X
Y
X + Y
X>Y
X<Y
COORD
DEV
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
125
4
4.10.3 Advanced position adjustment setting (Pattern search)
This section describes the setting procedure for accurate position adjustment.
[SRCH SPD] (Search speed)
Set the speed and resolution of the search.
The initial setting is [NORMAL].
The processing time becomes longer as the setting is changed from [FAST] to
[NORMAL], and then to [SUB_PIX] (Sub pixel).
The [SUB_PIX] setting enables detection with a high resolution of 0.1 pixels.
1. Place the cursor on [SRCH SPD] in the window menu and press the [ENT]
key.
The [SRCH SPD] (Search speed) menu appears.
2. Place the cursor on the desired option and press the [ENT] key to confirm
the selection for [SRCH SPD].
The processing time is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen (T=000000). Check
the value after changing the setting.
[SRCH SEN] (Search sensitivity)
Change the sensitivity of the search when the search is unstable or fails.
The initial setting is [AUTO].
The sensitivity of the search increases and the stability of detection enhances
as the setting is changed from [OBJT1] to [OBJT2], then to [AUTO], [FINE1],
and [FINE2].
SW
SRCH SPD
SRCH SEN
SRCH SPD
FAST
NORMAL
SUB PI X
Tips
OBJT1 Rough search Faster
OBJT2
AUTO
FINE1
FINE2 Fine search Slower
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
126
4
Note 1: When [OBJT1] or [OBJT2] is selected under [SRCH SEN], the maximum
size of a pattern window is 256 x 256 pixels.
[GRAVITY] (Gravity) mode searches the image for the position of the center of
gravity and its angle of principal axis of the binary-converted extracted color data
(The horizontal axis of the screen and the longitudinal axis of the smallest ellipse
enclosing a cluster of extracted colors form the angle of principal axis.)
Binary conversion processing speeds the processing; however, detection will be
unstable under the following conditions due to the operation principles.
Note 2: When the cluster of extracted colors spreads across the MEASURE
window.
Note 3: When two or more clusters with a similar size exist in the MEASURE
window.
Note 4: When the principal axis is not determined. (e.g. square and circular
objects)
1. Place the cursor on [SRCH SEN] in the window menu and press the [ENT]
key.
[SRCH SEN] menu appears.
2. Place the cursor on the desired option and press the [ENT] key to confirm
the selection for [SRCH SEN].
Increasing the SERCH SEN value slows the processing time. Do not set the sensitivity
higher than it needs to be.
Gravity
SRCH SPD
SRCH SEN
ANG ADJ
SRCH SEN
OBJT1
OBJT2
AUTO
FINE1
FINE2
Tips
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
127
4
4.10.4 Advanced position adjustment setting (Edge detection)
Selecting the edge detection mode
There are five modes for edge detection. In any mode, the screen is searched in
the direction set with SCAN for edge detection.
1. Place the cursor on [MENU] in the window menu and press the [ENT] key.
The search menu appears.
2. Place the cursor on [EDGE] and press the [ENT] key.
The message <ERASE SETTINGS N/Y> appears on the screen. Place the
cursor on Y and press the [ENT] key.
3. Place the cursor on [EDGEMODE] mode and press the [ENT] key.
4. Select the desired mode and press the [ENT] key.
X: To adjust the position only in the X-axis direction.
Y: To adjust the position only in the Y-axis direction.
WIND1
MENU
SEL SCRN
MENU
PATT
EDGE
EDGEMODE
X
Y
X+Y
X>Y
Y>X
COLOR
EDGEMODE
X
WINDOW X
X window
Y window
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
128
4
X+Y: To adjust the position in both X- and Y-axis directions.
X>Y: To adjust the position in the X-axis direction first, and then adjust the
position in the Y-axis direction.
Y>X: To adjust the position in the Y-axis direction first, and then adjust the
position in the X-axis direction.
Priority position adjustment
Example: X priority (X>Y) mode
When the X priority mode is selected, the X coordinate of the edge is searched in the
X window. The result (the difference between the registered X coordinate value and
the detected X coordinate value) is used to shift the Y window, and then the Y coordi-
nate of the edge is searched.
When the preferred edge position is extremely different from the registered position
and the shifted window disappears from the screen, the detection result is unacceptable
regardless of the coordinate value.
Y window
X window
Tips
X edge
Y window
Registered screen Y window is shifted.
The Y window is shifted off the screen.
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
129
4
WINDOW X and WINDOW Y settings
WINDOW X/WINDOW Y :
Set a window to search in the X-axis/Y-axis direction with [COORD]. The screen is
searched in the horizontal/vertical direction. Set the direction of the edge search
with [SCAN]. Use the [L]/[M] cursor to change the setting.
[EDGE SEN]: Set the sensitivity of the edge detection.
Setting range: 000 to 100 (Initial setting: 030)
A smaller value increases the sensitivity so that edges are detected with a
smaller difference in the brightness. Set the optimal sensitivity while watching
the monitor.
4.10.5 Advanced position adjustment (Tolerance setting)
[TOL] (Tolerance)
Select the coordinates or the deviation to set the edge tolerance.
[COORD] : Use the absolute coordinates to display the measured value and to
set the tolerance.
[DEV] : Use the difference from the reference value (registered screen) to
display the measured value and to set the tolerance.
1. Place the cursor on [TOL] in the window menu and press the [ENT] key.
2. Place the cursor on [COORD] or [DEV] and press the [ENT] key.
EDGEMODE
X
WINDOW X
WINDOW X
COORD
100, 220
400, 260
SCAN
BLWH
EDGE SEN
030
X window Search direction Y window Search window
[BL] [WH] Right to left [BL] [WH] Bottom to top
[WH] [BL] Right to left [WH] [BL] Bottom to top
[WH] [BL] Left to right [WH] [BL] Top to bottom
[BL] [WH] Left to right [BL] [WH] Top to bottom
TOL
ANG=010
FIT= 00
TOL
COORD
DEV
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
130
4
4.10.6 Sensitivity adjustment for edge detection
Adjusting the sensitivity for edge detection
When detection is unstable (e.g. some edges are not detected or unnecessary
edges are detected), adjust the sensitivity to optimize detection.
1. Place the cursor on [WINDOW X] in the window menu and press the [ENT]
key.
2. Place the cursor on [EDGE SEN] and press the [ENT] key.
The first digit of the sensitivity is shown as highlighted.
3. Change the value for the [EDGE SEN] using the [ENT] key.
The change in the values for [EDGE SEN] is reflected in the edge detection
status on the monitor screen. Set the optimal sensitivity while watching the
monitor.
A larger value decreases the sensitivity, and a smaller value increases the
sensitivity.
WINDOW X
COORD
100, 220
400, 260
SCAN
BLWH
EDGE SEN
030
EDGE SEN
030
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
WIND1
INSPECT
OUTER
SCRN REG
COLOR
SCAN
MEASURE
EDGE SEN
035
DATA
+0.000
TOL
H=+0.000
L=+0.000
ANALOG
T=
RAW SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
131
4
4.10.7 Adjusting the color extraction
Using a filter function on the screen
Follow the procedure below to set advanced processing (filter) to an image in order
to omit noise on the screen or to optimize detection. Up to two filters can be set,
and processing is operated following the order of selection.
1) Place the cursor on [FILTER] and press the [ENT] key.
2) Press the [L]/[M] cursor keys to select the desired filter.
3) Press the [ENT] key to select a filter function.
To remove the filter, select the chosen filter to be canceled and press the
[CLEAR] key.
Some combinations cannot be used simultaneously due to the types and
sequence of the filters. One filter cannot be used two or more times.
EXPAND1
EXPAND2
SHRINK
MEDIAN
AVERAGE
EDGE EM
EDGE EX
INVERT
SHADING
INT UP
TINT UP
e p y t r e t l i F n o i t p i r c s e D
1 D N A P X E
l e x i p t s e t h g i r b e h t f o l e v e l e h t o t n i n e e r c s e h t n o l e x i p h c a e s e t a l s n a r T
e z i l i b a t s o t a e r a d e t c a r t x e e h t s d n a p x E . a e r a 3 x 3 g n i d n u o r r u s e h t n i h t i w
. s r e t s u l c d n a s e g d e d e t c e n n o c s i d d n a l l a m s f o g n i s s e c o r p e h t
2 D N A P X E
n o i s n a p x e e h t e t a r e p o o t 2 D N A P X E t c e l e S . 1 D N A P X E s a g n i s s e c o r p e m a S
. e c i w t g n i s s e c o r p
K N I R H S
n i h t i w l e x i p t s e k r a d e h t f o l e v e l e h t o t n i n e e r c s e h t n o l e x i p h c a e s e t a l s n a r T
. e s i o n f o s t n u o m a l l a m s g n i c u d e r n i e v i t c e f f E . a e r a 3 x 3 g n i d n u o r r u s e h t
N A I D E M
l e x i p t s e t h g i r b h t f i f e h t f o l e v e l e h t o t n i n e e r c s e h t n o l e x i p h c a e s e t a l s n a r T
e h t g n i t c e f f a t u o h t i w e s i o n e h t s e c u d e R . a e r a 3 x 3 g n i d n u o r r u s e h t n i h t i w
. e g n a r n o i t c a r t x e e h t f o e z i s
E G A R E V A
n i h t i w l e v e l s s e n t h g i r b e g a r e v a e h t o t n i n e e r c s e h t n o l e x i p h c a e s e t a l s n a r T
m u m i x a m e h t m o r f e g a r e v a e h t s d n i f t i e s u a c e B . a e r a 3 x 3 g n i d n u o r r u s e h t
g n i t a n i m i l e n i e v i t c e f f e e r o m s i t i , l e v e l s s e n t h g i r b e h t f o e u l a v m u m i n i m d n a
. N A I D E M e h t n a h t e s i o n
M E E G D E . e g a m i e h t f o a e r a t h g i r b d n a k r a d e h t n e e w t e b r e d r o b e h t s e z i s a h p m E
X E E G D E e g a m i e h t f o a e r a t h g i r b d n a k r a d e h t n e e w t e b r e d r o b e h t s y a l p s i d y l n O
T R E V N I . a e r a k r a d d n a t h g i r b e h t s t r e v n I
G N I D A H S . w o d n i w e h t n i y t i s n e t n i s u o n i m u l d e i r a v e h t s t s u j d A
P U T N I . e g a m i e h t f o y t i l i b i s i v e h t t s u j d a o t n e e r c s e h t f o y t i s n e t n i e h t s e s a e r c n I
P U T N I T . e g a m i e h t f o r o l o c e h t n e p r a h s o t n e e r c s e h t f o t n i t e h t s e s a e r c n I
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
132
4
Basic concepts of the filter function
I EXPAND I EDGE EX
I SHRINK I INVERT
I MEDIAN I SHADING
I AVERAGE I INT UP
I EDGE EM I TINT UP
4) When the target colors are varied, for example when setting the [COLOR] for
two or more targets, re-register the screen [SCRN REG] and repeat the
color extraction process described in Basic Settings page 36.
5) Press the [ESCAPE] key to register the color settings.
Note: The color setting interacts with the filter function. When the settings for one
window are copied to another window using the method described on page 44, the
filter type is copied accordingly.
Setting the color extraction level
Do not use this function for normal operation. When the color is not extracted
properly, display the histogram of the screens color data to operate detailed color
extraction.
This function is useful when a search is not functioning properly with [GRAVITY1/2]
for [SERCH SEN] setting. If an area other than the desired area for the search is
converted into a binary level, change the binary level to normalize the search.
I [LEVEL] setting procedure
1. Display the color extraction menu.
LEVEL
FILTER
The median
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
133
4
2. Place the cursor on [LEVEL] and press the [ENT] key.
The histogram appears.
The horizontal axis represents the color level, and the vertical axis represents
the number of pixels. The distribution of pixels is displayed for each color level.
H is the upper limit and L is the lower limit. The color extraction is operated
between the upper and lower limit. By setting the H and L to a level with
concentrated distribution, undesired effects (e.g. variation of intensity) are likely
to occur.
2 indicates the binary level. The levels above 2 will be converted into green.
3. The setting range for [LEVEL] is shown in blue. Press the [ ]/[ ] cursor
(panel key) or move the [ENT] key to the right or left to select the desired
level.
4. Press the [ENT] key.
The selected level is shown in red.
5. Change the level into the desired level. Press the [ ]/[ ] cursor (panel
key) or move the [ENT] key to the right or left to select the desired level.
6. Press the [ENT] key to confirm the level selection.
The level display returns to blue.
7. Repeat the above procedure (steps 3 to 6) to confirm the other levels.
8. Press the [ESCAPE] key to exit the level setting and return to the color
extraction menu.
H: Upper limit
2: Binary level
L: Lower limit
LEVEL
FILTER
L
L
L
L
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
134
4
4.11 Optional Settings
4.11.1 Saving the running images
Up to eight captured images in the [RUN] mode can be saved for future readout.
The read-out screen can be used for processing and checking the data.
Use this function to check a screen with an unacceptable detection result in RUN
mode at a later date.
Note 1: The screens under the RUN operation mode can be saved. The screens
under the PROGRAM mode cannot be saved.
Note 2: When saving more than eight screens, the saved screens are over-written
in sequence starting from the earliest data.
Note 3: The screens under ARE/CON mode cannot be saved.
Note 4: The processing speed slows down slightly when using the SAVE SCR
function.
Note 5: Up to four screens can be saved for each camera when two cameras are
connected.
Note 6: The data is saved in RAM inside the controller. The saved data will be lost
when the power is turned off. To keep the record, save the data in the
CompactFlash memory ( page 171).
Note 7: A saved screen cannot be used as a registered screen.
Preparations
Advance setting is required to save the captured screen.
Set the SAVE SCR parameters with the environmental setting menu.
1. Put the CV-701(P)/751(P) in [PROGRAM] mode.
2. Press the [ESCAPE] key for at least two seconds.
The environmental setting menu appears.
3. Place the cursor on [SAVE SCR] and press the [ENT] key.
The cursor goes to the item in the right column.
4. Change the settings using the [L]/[M] cursor key. Setting options are as
follows:
OFF: The screens are not saved.
ALL: All captured screens are saved.
NG: Only unacceptable images are saved.
MEMORY CARD
WHITE BALANCE
SETUP MENU
CHANGE CONSOLE
OUT MODE N.O.
RS232C BPS 38400
RS232C OUT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
LANGUAGE JAPANESE
OUTPUT SYMBOL COLOR
AUTO OFF OFF
TRIGGER EXTERNAL
SAVE SCR OFF
COPY NO. No.00 TO No.00
AUTO SEQUENCE OFF NUM 4
CLOCK 00/03/30
06:46:46
AUTO OFF
TRIGGER
SAVE SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
135
4
With the panel keys
Press the [L] or [M] cursor key.
With the remote control console
Move the [ENT] key up or down.
5. Press the [ENT] key to confirm the setting.
6. Press the [ESCAPE] key to return to the PROGRAM screen.
Reading saved screens
1. Put the CV-701(P)/751(P) in PROGRAM mode.
2. Place the cursor on [OPTION] and press the [ENT] key.
The option selection menu appears.
3. Place the cursor on [SVD SCRN] and press the [ENT] key.
The cursor goes to [SCRN SEL].
4. Press the [ENT] key.
The list of saved screens appears. The list is in descending order from the last
saving.
5. Select the desired saved screen for display.
Placing the cursor on the desired option changes the screen display.
With the panel keys
Press the [L] or [M] cursor.
With the remote control console
Move the [ENT] key up and down.
6. Press the [ENT] key to confirm the selection.
To display the saved screen, press the [ESCAPE] key to return to the initial
menu screen.
To check the measured data with the saved screen, go to the next step.
OPTION
SVD SCRN
ILLU
DATA CAL
PROGRAM
SCRN SEL
TEST
SCRN SEL
00/07/08 06:32:15
00/07/08 06:32:13
00/07/08 06:31:53
00/07/08 06:18:25
00/07/08 06:17:37
00/07/08 06:17:23
SCRN SEL
00/07/08 06:32:15
00/07/08 06:32:13
00/07/08 06:31:53
00/07/08 06:18:25
00/07/08 06:17:37
00/07/08 06:17:23
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
136
4
7. Place the cursor on [TEST] and press the [ENT] key.
The measured data with the saved screen is displayed.
The test mode of the saved screen does not output the detection results.
8. Press the [ENT] key to return to the initial menu screen.
4.11.2 Illumination adjustment function
The illumination adjustment function automatically adjusts the intensity of illumina-
tion. A variation in luminance over time does not affect the stability of the detection.
The illumination adjustment function is available with all measurement modes;
however, it cannot follow sporadic changes.
The illumination for the first trigger input under the trigger mode is not adjusted.
Processing time of the illumination adjustment
ARE/CON mode
There is a delay of approx. 0.3 seconds before the illumination is adjusted;
however, the total processing remains unchanged.
INS/TRG mode
The processing time remains unchanged.
INS+POS, ABS.POS, and REL.POS modes
The processing time remains unchanged.
1. Place the cursor on [OPTION] in the main menu and press the [ENT] key.
The option menu appears.
2. Place the cursor on [ILLU] and press the [ENT] key.
The cursor goes to [CAM1].
3. Place the cursor on [CAM1] or [CAM2] and press the [ENT] key.
The ON/OFF selection menu appears.
4. Place the cursor on [ON] and press the [ENT] key.
A window (frame) appears on the screen.
PROGRAM
SCRN SEL
TEST
Tips
OPTION
SVD SCRN
ILLU
DATA CAL
PROGRAM
CAM1
OFF
CAM1
OFF
ON
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
137
4
5. Move the [ENT] key to set a window with a constant luminance to a de-
sired area outside of the target.
6. Press the [ENT] key.
The window position is confirmed.
7. Press the [ESCAPE] key to confirm the setting and exit the selection
menu.
Note: Set the window for illumination adjustment to an area with medium bright-
ness. Setting the window in areas with too much or too little luminance will saturate
the illumination adjustment function with slight changes in brightness, leading to
unstable detection.
4.11.3 Unit conversion
Converting a measured value
The measured value is normally displayed in units of pixels. When the data calcula-
tion is set, the value can be displayed in mm. The displayed value is converted
based on the set conversion ratio.
The output from the terminal is an unconverted value.
1. Place the cursor on [OPTION] and press the [ENT] key. The option menu
appears.
2. Place the cursor on [DATA CAL] and press the [ENT] key.
The data calculation menu appears.
3. Set the conversion ratio.
The measured data is normally displayed in units of pixels. When a conversion
ratio (multiple span) is set, the value can be displayed in mm. The conversion
ratio can be specified from 0.01 times through 100 times.
Example Number of pixels x Span = mm
1) Place the cursor on [MULTIPLY] and press the [ENT] key. The first digit, 0,
is shown as highlighted. You can enter a numerical value.
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
CAM1
040, 040
140, 140
T=
RAW SCR
Tips
OPTION
SVD SCRN
ILLU
DATA CAL
DATA CAL
MULTIPLY 01.00
OFFSET X +0.000
OFFSET Y +0.000
OFFSET
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
138
4
2) Move the [ENT] key to the right or left to select a digit to be changed.
3) Change the value.
With the panel keys
Press the [L] cursor repeatedly.
With the remote control console
Move the [ENT] key up repeatedly. The value increments by one, and after 9
the second digit is incremented. Pressing the [M] cursor or moving the [ENT]
key down decrements the value to 0.
4) Press the [ENT] key.
The conversion ration is confirmed.
4. Set the offset function.
When two areas are picked up with two cameras, the distance between the two
areas is interpolated by the offset function to calculate the actual size.
Set the offset values for both [OFFSET X] (X-axis direction) and [OFFSET Y]
(Y-axis direction).
Example Number of pixels x Span + Offset = mm
1) Place the cursor on [OFFSET X] and press the [ENT] key. The first digit, 0,
is shown as highlighted. You can enter a numerical value.
2) Move the [ENT] key to the right or left and select the digit to be changed.
3) Change the numerical value. The value increments by one, and after 9 the
second digit is incremented. Pressing the [L] cursor or moving the [ENT] key
down decrements the value to 0.
4) Press the [ENT] key.
The offset value for the X-axis direction is confirmed.
5) Place the cursor on [OFFSET Y] and repeat the above procedure.
DATA CAL
MULTIPLY 01.00
OFFSET X +0.000
OFFSET Y +0.000
OFFSET
DATA CAL
MULTIPLY 00.50
OFFSET X +0.000
OFFSET Y +0.000
OFFSET
DATA CAL
MULTIPLY 00.50
OFFSET X +0.000
OFFSET Y +0.000
OFFSET
DATA CAL
MULTIPLY 00.50
OFFSET X +0.000
OFFSET Y +0.000
OFFSET
DATA CAL
MULTIPLY 00.50
OFFSET X +40.00
OFFSET Y +0.000
OFFSET
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
139
4
5. Set the enable/disable of the offset function.
Set whether you want to enable or disable the offset function for each window.
G: Enabled
: Disabled
1) Place the cursor on [OFFSET] and press the [ENT] key.
2) Move the [ENT] key to the right and left to select a desired window.
3) Change the setting with [L]/[M] cursor keys.
4) Press the [ENT] key.
6. Press the [ESCAPE] key.
The data calculation function is set.
Note 1: The setting for MULTIPLY under DATA CAL is applied for all windows.
Select the enabled/disabled offset function for each window.
Note 2: The DATA CAL function is not activated when the INS mode is set to
[AREA], [POINT], [COUNT], [STAIN] or [EDGE NO].
DATA CAL
MULTIPLY 00.50
OFFSET X +40.00
OFFSET Y +0.000
OFFSET o
Window 1 Window 2
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
140
4
4.12 Operation Check of the Setting Status
The CV-701(P)/751(P) is able to save the state of focus, exposure and position
after setting is complete. Use the saved data to compare and check with the initial
condition when there is a change of target.
4.12.1 Saving the setting status
Save the focus and exposure under the current setting.
1. Prepare a test piece. Prepare a sheet of white paper with a rectangle filled
in black.
Make sure the length of the longitudinal side of the rectangle is about 1/4 of the
field of view. You can set a desired aspect ratio.
2. Put the CV-701(P)/751(P) to PROGRAM mode.
3. Hold down the [ESCAPE] key for at least two seconds.
The environmental setting menu appears on the screen.
4. Place the cursor on [SETUP MENU] and press the [ENT] key.
The setup menu appears on the screen.
5. Place the test piece prepared in step 1 into the field of view. Make sure the
black rectangle is in the center of the monitor screen. Place the test piece
on a flat surface so that there is no curvature or warpage of the piece.
The screen updates every time the [TRIG] key is pressed.
Note: Be sure the black rectangle does not cover the exposure bars on the four
sides of the screen.
When CAM2 is set, place the cursor on [CAM1] and press the [ENT] key to select
the camera.
MEMORY CARD
WHITE BALANCE
SETUP MENU
SETUP
SAVE
CAM1
CAL AREA
PINT
SET
00/03/30
06:41:13
NOW
SETUP
SAVE
CAM2
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
141
4
6. Place the cursor on [SAVE] and press the [ENT] key.
7. The saving of settings is completed.
Press the [ESCAPE] key to display the environmental setting menu.
4.12.2 Comparing with the saved setting status
Compare the saved setting status with the current setting status.
1. Put the CV-701(P)/751(P) into PROGRAM mode.
2. Hold down the [ESCAPE] key for at least two seconds.
The environmental setting menu appears on the screen.
3. Place the cursor on [SETUP MENU] and press the [ENT] key.
The setup menu appears on the screen.
4. Place the test piece prepared in step 1 of Saving the setting status on
the previous page into the field of view. Make sure the black rectangle is
in the center of the monitor screen. Place the test piece on a flat surface
so that it will not have any R.
Make sure to use the same test piece used for the previous saving.
The screen updates every time the [TRIG] key is pressed.
5. Compare the saved status and current status.
Check the screen for the exposure and focus status.
The blue lines indicate saved status, and the red lines indicate the current
status.
The longer bar indicates an increased exposure to light.
The larger circle indicates a looser focus.
Note: Be sure the black rectangle does not cover the exposure bars on the four
sides of the screen.
6. Adjust all of the settings so that they will agree with the saved status.
7. The operation check of the setting status is complete.
Press the [ESCAPE] key to display the environmental setting menu.
SETUP
SAVE
CAM1
SETUP
SAVE
CAM1
CAL AREA
PINT
SET
00/03/30
06:41:13
NOW
Indicates the focus. The
blue circle indicates the
saved status, and the
red circle indicates the
current status.
Indicates the center position. The blue
line indicates the saved status, and the
red line indicates the current status.
Indicates the exposure status. The blue
indicator shows the saved status, and the
red indicator shows the current status.
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
142
4
4.13 Initialization
Initialize the settings when you want to reset all of the settings or when the CV-
701(P)/751(P) operates abnormally.
Note 1: Initialization clears all settings to the factory-set values.
Note 2: If you need to save the settings, save them in the CompactFlash memory,
personal computer through the RS-232C, or take note of the necessary settings.
4.13.1 Initialization of all settings
1. Hold down the [CLEAR] key and turn on the power.
The message <INIT SETTING> appears on the screen and initialization starts.
4.13.2 Initialization by program number
You can initialize the settings of one of the 16 programs from 0 to 15 by selecting
the saved program number.
1. Use the [ENT] and [ESCAPE] keys to place the cursor on the [No.] of the
program to be initialized.
2. Hold down the [CLEAR] key for at least two seconds.
The message <ERASE SETTINGS N/Y> appears on the screen.
To cancel initialization, select [N] and press the [ENT] key.
To execute initialization, select [Y] and press the [ENT] key.
KEYENCE
INIT SETTING
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ERASE SETTINGS N / Y
CAM1 CAM2
PROGRAM
No.00
MODE
ARE/CON
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
DATA
000000
TOL
H=000000
L=000000
OPTION
SAVE
T=
RAW SCR
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
143
4
4.14 Input/Output Operation in PROGRAM Mode
Even in PROGRAM mode, the CV-701(P)/751(P) accepts a trigger input or pro-
vides a BUSY output so that the detection result and numerical value are displayed
on the screen. A comparator output is not provided. Use the result and value as a
test operation for adjustment.
The following table lists the input/output operations in PROGRAM mode.
Note: A trigger input is not accepted in PROGRAM mode during setting proce-
dures such as drawing a window or setting values. A trigger input is accepted only
when the [TRIGGER] key on the panel keys or the remote control console can be
used.
/ l a n i m r e t O / I
r o t c e n n o c
l a n g i S
e m a n
n o i t p i r c s e D s u t a t S
l a n i m r e t t u p n I G R T l a n g i s g n i m i t r o f t u p n i r e g g i r T d e l b a n E
r o t c e n n o c t u p n I
T S P t u p n i n o i t c e l e s t u p t u o a t a D d e l b a s i D
2 C E R / 1 C E R
a s r e t s i g e R ( t u p n i n o i t a r t s i g e r n e e r c S
s i n i p s i h t n e h w l a n g i s G R T a t a n e e r c s
) . d e t i u c r i c - t r o h s
d e l b a s i D
3 I C o t 0 I C ) B S L ( 0 t u p n i . o N m a r g o r P d e l b a s i D
2 I W o t 0 I W t u p n i n o i t c e l e s w o d n i w t u p t u O d e l b a s i D
T N O C
e h t n e h w n o i t a r e p o s u o u n i t n o c s t r a t S
l a n r e t x e n a t u o h t i w d e h c t i w s s i m a r g o r p
. l a n g i s r e g g i r t
d e l b a s i D
l a n i m r e t t u p t u O
8 0 W o t 1 0 W t u p t u o r o t a r a p m o c w o d n i W d e l b a s i D
R O W 8 O W o t 1 O W f o t u p t u o R O d e l b a s i D
O T S t u p t u o r o f t u p t u o l a n g i s e b o r t S d e l b a s i D
r o t c e n n o c t u p t u O
Y S U B t u p t u o l a n g i s Y S U B d e l b a n E
E L O P . D t u p t u o l a n g i s a t a d n o i t i s o P d e l b a s i D
2 1 D o t 0 D t u p t u o a t a D d e l b a s i D
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
144
4
4.15 Environmental Settings
The environmental settings include the display settings and external input settings.
This section describes each environmental setting and the procedure for changing
the settings.
4.15.1 Changing the environmental settings
You can set or check the following items in the environmental settings.
See page 145 for details.
1. Put the CV-701(P)/751(P) in PROGRAM mode.
2. Press the [ESCAPE] key for at least two seconds.
The environmental setting menu appears.
3. Place the cursor on the desired item.
4. Press the [ENT] key.
The cursor goes to the item in the right column.
5. Change the setting.
With the panel keys
Press the [L]/[M] cursor key.
With the remote control console
Move the [ENT] key up or down.
6. Press the [ENT] key.
The setting is confirmed.
7. Press the [ESCAPE] key to return to the PROGRAM menu.
MEMORY CARD
WHITE BALANCE
SETUP MENU
CHANGE CONSOLE
OUT MODE N.O.
RS232C BPS 38400
RS232C OUT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
LANGUAGE JAPANESE
OUTPUT SYMBOL COLOR
AUTO OFF OFF
TRIGGER EXTERNAL
SAVE SCR OFF
COPY NO. No.00 TO No.00
AUTO SEQUENCE OFF NUM 4
CLOCK 00/03/30
06:46:46
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
145
4
4.15.2 Environmental setting list
* indicates the initial setting value.
r e t e m a r a P g n i t t e S n o i t p i r c s e D n o i t c n u F
Y R O M E M
D R A C
. u n e m b u s o T
r o f 1 7 1 e g a p e e S
. s l i a t e d
d n a s g n i t t e s e h t d a e r / e v a S
e h t m o r f / o t n e e r c s d e v a s
. y r o m e m h s a l F t c a p m o C
e h t t u o d a e r / e v a s o T
n e e r c s d e v a s d n a s g n i t t e s
h s a l F t c a p m o C e h t m o r f / o t
. y r o m e m
E T I H W
E C N A L A B
. u n e m b u s o T
r o f 8 4 1 e g a p e e S
. s l i a t e d
. e c n a l a b e t i h w e h t t s u j d A
e t i h w e h t t s u j d a o T
. e c n a l a b
P U T E S
U N E M
. u n e m b u s o T
r o f 0 4 1 e g a p e e S
. s l i a t e d
s g n i t t e s e h t t u o d a e r / e v a S
d n a , e r u s o p x e , s u c o f f o
. n o i t i s o p e c n e r e f e r
. s g n i t t e s e h t e r a p m o c o T
E G N A H C
* E L O S N O C
l o r t n o c e t o m e r e h t e s U
e h t e g n a h c o t e l o s n o c
. o N m a r g o r p
m a r g o r p e h t e g n a h c o T
l o r t n o c e t o m e r e h t h t i w . o N
. e l o s n o c
L A N I M R E T
o t r o t c e n n o c O / I e h t e s U
r o . o N m a r g o r p e h t e g n a h c
. w o d n i w t u p t u o e h t
m a r g o r p e h t e g n a h c o T
w o d n i w t u p t u o e h t r o . o N
l a n r e t x e n a g n i t t u p n i y b
r o t c e n n o c O / I e h t o t l a n g i s
. e d o m N U R g n i r u d
E D O M T U O
* . O . N n e p o - y l l a m r o N
e h t n e h w t u p t u o o T
e d i s t u o s i t l u s e r n o i t c e t e d
. e g n a r e c n a r e l o t e h t f o
. C . N d e s o l c - y l l a m r o N
e h t n e h w t u p t u o o T
f o n i h t i w s i t l u s e r n o i t c e t e d
. e g n a r e c n a r e l o t e h t
C 2 3 2 - S R
S P B
/ 0 0 2 , 9 1 / 0 0 6 , 9
* 0 0 4 , 8 3
n o i t a c i n u m m o c e h t t e S
. d e e p s
e h t e g n a h c o T
. d e e p s n o i t a c i n u m m o c
) . c e s / s t i b f o . o N (
C 2 3 2 - S R
T U O
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
t u p t u o C 2 3 2 - S R e h t t c e l e S
. a t a d
e p y t a t a d e h t t c e l e s o T
. C 2 3 2 - S R y b t u p t u o
E G A U G N A L
* E S E N A P A J
e s e n a p a J e h t e s U
. e g a u g n a l
u n e m e h t e g n a h c o T
. e s e n a p a J o t y a l p s i d
H S I L G N E . e g a u g n a l h s i l g n E e h t e s U
u n e m e h t e g n a h c o T
. h s i l g n E o t y a l p s i d
T U P T U O
L O B M Y S
* R O L O C
n o i t c e t e d e h t s y a l p s i D
d n a , d e r , n e e r g h t i w t l u s e r
. s r o t a c i d n i e t i h w
s i r o t i n o m r o l o c a n e h W
. d e s u
O N O M
n o i t c e t e d e h t s y a l p s i D
h t i w t l u s e r d n a ? , x ,
. s l o b m y s
e t i h w - d n a - k c a l b a n e h W
. d e s u s i r o t i n o m
F F O O T U A
* F F O
t h g i l k c a b c i t a m o t u a e l b a s i D
. f f o - t u h s
l l a t h g i l k c a b e h t n o n r u t o T
. e m i t e h t
N O
t h g i l k c a b c i t a m o t u a e l b a n E
) y l n o ) P ( 1 5 7 - V C ( . f f o - t u h s
t h g i l k c a b e h t f f o n r u t o T
t h g i l k c a B ( . y l l a c i t a m o t u a
) . s r h 0 0 0 , 0 4 : e f i l g n i t a r e p o
R E G G I R T
* L A N R E T X E
h c a e t a n o i t c e t e d e t u c e x E
. t u p n i r e g g i r t
h t i w n o i t c e t e d l o r t n o c o T
. t u p n i r e g g i r t l a n r e t x e
L A N R E T N I
n o i t c e t e d e t u c e x E
t u o h t i w y l s u o u n i t n o c
y b s t u p n i r e g g i r t l a n r e t x e
r e g g i r t g n i c u d o r p y l l a n r e t n i
. n o - r e w o p m o r f s l a n g i s
t u o h t i w n o i t c e t e d t a e p e r o T
r e g g i r t l a n r e t x e g n i s u
. e d o m r e g g i r t e h t n i s l a n g i s
R C S E V A S
* F F O . d e v a s e r a s n e e r c s o N
. n e e r c s a e v a s o T
L L A
s n e e r c s l l a s e v a S
n o i t c e t e d e h t f o s s e l d r a g e r
. t l u s e r
G N
n e e r c s d e r u t p a c e h t s e v a S
e l b a t p e c c a n u n a h t i w
. t l u s e r n o i t c e t e d
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
146
4
r e t e m a r a P g n i t t e S n o i t p i r c s e D n o i t c n u F
. O N Y P O C
. o N m a r g o r p e c r u o S
t e g r a T , ) 5 1 o t 0 0 (
. o N m a r g o r p
) 5 1 o t 0 0 (
r o f 6 4 1 e g a p e e S
. g n i t t e s e h t
t e g r a t d n a e c r u o s e h t t e S
t c e l e s d n a . s o N m a r g o r p
. y p o c o t K O
e n o f o s g n i t t e s e h t y p o c o T
r e h t o n a o t . o N m a r g o r p
. o N m a r g o r p
O T U A
E C N E U Q E S
r o f 7 4 1 e g a p e e S
. g n i t t e s e h t
F F O n o i t a r e p o l a m r o N
r o f . s o N m a r g o r p e h t t e S
. n o i t a r e p o l a i t n e u q e s
) 1 E D O M (
l a r e v e s e t u c e x e o T
y l l a i t n e u q e s . s o N m a r g o r p
. l a n g i s r e g g i r t e n o h t i w
r o f . s o N m a r g o r p e h t t e S
. n o i t a r e p o l a i t n e u q e s
) 2 E D O M (
l a r e v e s e t u c e x e o T
y l l a i t n e u q e s . s o N m a r g o r p
e h T . l a n g i s r e g g i r t e n o h t i w
t n e m t s u j d a n o i t i s o p
g n i t r a t s e h t d n a n o i t c n u f
. a t a d n o m m o c e s u . o N
K C O L C t u p n i r a d n e l a C
d n a e m i t t n e s e r p e h t t u p n I
. e t a d
. r a d n e l a c e h t t s u j d a o T
4.15.3 Useful functions
Automatic backlight shut-off [AUTO OFF] (CV-751(P) only)
Turns off the backlight of the monitor automatically. To activate this function, place
the cursor on [AUTO OFF] in the environmental setting menu and select ON.
(The backlight has an operating life of 40,000 hours.)
The backlight is turned off under the following conditions:
10 or more minutes have passed since the last key operation, detection of
results outside of the tolerance range, or message appearances on the screen.
The backlight is turned on again when one of the following occurs:
Any key is pressed.
A control signal is input from the external devices through RS-232C.
The detection result goes outside of the tolerance range.
A message appears on the screen.
Copying the program number [COPY NO.]
The settings of one program number can be copied to another program number.
1. Place the cursor on [COPY NO.] and press the [ENT] key.
The cursor goes to the source number field.
2. Press the [L]/[M] cursor keys or move the [ENT] key up or down to select
the source program number and press the [ENT] key.
The cursor goes to the target number field.
3. Press the [L]/[M] cursor keys or move the [ENT] key up or down to select
the target program number and press the [ENT] key.
The cursor goes to [OK?].
4. Press the [ENT] key to copy the settings.
When the [ESCAPE] key is pressed at any time during the procedure, the
cursor returns to [COPY NO.].
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
147
4
Sequential operation [AUTO SEQUENCE]
Executes the operations of several programs sequentially with one trigger signal by
automatically switching the program numbers. The limitations below are placed on
the first program number. Up to four programs starting from the first program
number can be sequentially processed. ( See page 164 for the timing diagrams. )
Note 1: The first program number can be set with the I/O terminal/connector when
[CHANGE] in the environmental setting menu is set to [TERMINAL].
Note 2: The CV-701(P)/751(P) bypasses the program number under [ARE/CON]
mode and unused program numbers.
e.g.) When the number for [AUTO SEQUENCE] processing is set to 4 with the
following settings, only program No. 0 will be processed.
No.0: [ABS. POS]
No.1/2/3: [ARE/CON]
The [Num] in the setting parameters indicates the number of programs to be
processed sequentially.
<e.g.>
When the first program number is set to No.4 and [Num] is set to 2, program
Nos. 4 and 5 are processed sequentially.
<Requirements for the first program number>
[Num]=2: The first program numbers can be selected from 2n (0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12,
14) only.
[Num]=3/4: The first program numbers can be selected from 4n (0, 4, 8, 12)
only.
Note: When the selected first program number does not satisfy the requirements,
the [AUTO SEQUENCE] function is not activated and only the selected program
number will be processed.
When a trigger signal is input and the CV starts processing, the display is fixed to the
screen of the first program number.
1. Set the program numbers in advance for sequential operation.
2. Place the cursor on [AUTO SEQUENCE] and press the [ENT] key.
The cursor goes to [OFF].
3. Press the [L]/[M] cursor key to set the parameters for [AUTO
SEQUENCE].
Note: When the AUTO SEQUENCE is set to MODE2, the CV processes programs
of [INS+POS] mode.
Setting parameters
OFF 2
AUTO SEQUENCE MODE1 Num 3
MODE2 4
Tips
MODE2 Executes the operations of several programs sequentially at one trigger signal.
Up to four programs can be processed. The position adjustment function uses
the data of the first program number to process the other programs.
MODE1 Executes the operations of several programs sequentially at one trigger signal.
(Up to four programs can be processed.)
OFF Executes normal operation.
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
148
4
4. Press the [ENT] key.
The cursor goes to 2.
5. Press the [L]/[M] cursor key to select the value for [Num].
6. Press the [ENT] key and return to the environmental setting menu.
Adjusting the white balance
Adjust the image using the actual illumination for detection so that white objects are
projected in white. Adjustments of the white balance are required every time the
targets and illumination are changed.
1. Place the cursor on [WHITE BALANCE] and press the [ENT] key.
The adjustment menu appears on the screen.
A frame and message REGISTER WHITE T appears on the screen. Place
a sheet of white paper in front of the camera.
The screen updates with every trigger signal input.
2. Place the cursor on [SET] and press the [ENT] key.
The white balance for camera 1 is adjusted.
3. Press the [ESCAPE] key to return to the environmental setting menu when
only one camera is connected. When two cameras are connected, go to
step 4.
4. Place the cursor on [CAM1] and press the [ENT] key.
[CAM2] is selected and the adjustment menu for camera 2 appears.
A frame and message REGISTER WHITE T appears on the screen. Place
a sheet of white paper in front of the camera.
The screen updates with every trigger signal input.
5. Place the cursor on [SET] and press the [ENT] key.
The white balance for camera 2 is adjusted.
6. Press the [ESCAPE] key to return to the environmental setting menu.
REGISTER WHITE T
WHITE BALANCE
SET
CAM1
R= 027
G= 017
B= 024
SET
CAM1
SET
CAM1
SET
CAM2
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
149
4
Adjusting the clock
Adjust the time and date of the clock built into the CV-701(P)/751(P).
1. Place the cursor on [CLOCK] and press the [ENT] key.
The digit of the year is shown as highlighted. You can adjust the setting.
The time and date are displayed as follows:
Year/Month/Date
Hour/Minute/Second
2. Move the cursor to the right and left to select the digit to be changed.
3. Press the [L]/[M] cursor key or move the [ENT] key up/down repeatedly.
With the panel keys
Press the [L] cursor key repeatedly.
With the remote control console
Press the [ENT] key up repeatedly. The value increments, and after 9 the
second digit is incremented. Every time the [M] cursor key is pressed or the
[ENT] key is held down, the value decrements to 0.
4. Press the [ENT] key.
The setting is confirmed.
5. Press the [ESCAPE] key to return to the environmental setting menu.
Note: Second cannot be adjusted.
Setting the RS-232C output data
Select the format of data to be output with RS-232C communication.
See page 182 for data formats.
RS-232C OUT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The numbers indicate (from the left):
Data 0: Output setting of judgment result (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Data 1: Output setting of number of pixels (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Data 2: Output setting of the measured value [INS] mode (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Data 3: Output setting of X coordinate (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Data 4: Output setting of Y coordinate (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Data 5: Output setting of correlation ratio (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Data 6: Output setting of rotation angle (0: OFF, 1: ON)
All settings are factory-configured to 0.
1. Place the cursor on [RS-232C OUT] and press the [ENT] key.
The first digit is shown as highlighted. You can change the settings.
2. Move the cursor to the right and left to select the digit to be set.
COPY NO.
AUTO SEQUENCE
CLOCK
CLOCK 00/04/07
12:49:57
CLOCK 00/07/07
12:49:57
Tips
RS232C BPS 38400
RS232C OUT 0000000
RS232C BPS 38400
RS232C OUT 1000000
Chapter 4 Setting Procedure
150
4
3. Press the [L]/[M] cursor key or move the [ENT] key up or down to change
the value.
4. Press the [ENT] key after setting all digits.
The CV returns to the environmental setting menu.
Chapter 5
Operation
This chapter describes RUN mode and the controls available during RUN
mode operation.
5.1 Entering RUN Mode ........................................................... 152
5.2 Controls Available in RUN Mode ...................................... 153
Chapter 5 Operation
152 152
5
5.1 Entering RUN Mode
This section describes RUN mode. Before entering RUN mode, complete the
settings described in Chapter 4 Setting Procedure.
1. Change the PROGRAM mode to RUN mode.
With the panel keys
Hold down the [RUN/PROGRAM] key for at least two seconds.
With the remote control console
Use one of the following two methods to enter RUN mode.
Slide up the mode selection switch to RUN.
Unplug the remote control console from the controller.
2. Once the CV-701(P)/751(P) enters RUN mode, [RUN] appears in the upper
right of the screen.
When ARE/CON mode is selected, the CV-701(P)/751(P) starts and
continues detection, judgment, and displaying results.
When a mode other than ARE/CON mode is selected, the CV-701(P)/
751(P) starts detection, judgment, and displaying results every time a trigger
signal is input.
Note: Once the CV-701(P)/751(P) enters RUN mode, the setting operation from
the remote control console or the panel keys is disabled. You can use only the
[SCREEN], [TRIG], [PROGRAM No.], and [WINDOW] keys and the mode selection
slide switch.
Key-lock function (CV-751(P))
When the key-lock function is activated, the operation of all keys except for the
[SCREEN] and [WINDOW] keys is disabled to prevent accidental key operation.
Set the key-lock function in PROGRAM mode before entering RUN mode.
To set the key-lock function
Hold down the [ ] and [ ] cursor keys simultaneously for at
least two seconds. When the function is activated, [KEY
LOCK] appears at the bottom of the menu screen.
To cancel the key-lock function
Hold down the [ ] and [ ] cursor keys simultaneously for at
least two seconds. The display [KEY LOCK] disappears and
key operation is enabled.
SCREEN
WINDOW
RUN
PROG
PROGRAM No.
RUN
PROG
ESCAPE
ENT
RUN
Mode selection
slide switch
KEY
LOCK

C S cr ,
NUM
2
NUM
1
NUM
3
Chapter 5 Operation
153 153
5
e d o M
r e t n e o t w o H
e d o m e h t
s n o i t a r e p o e l b a l i a v A
e c n e r e f e R
e g a p
N U R
e h t n i E G N A H C t e S
g n i t t e s l a t n e m n o r i v n e
E L O S N O C o t u n e m
e h t t e s n e h t d n a
h c t i w s e d i l s s e l o s n o c
. N U R o t
/ l a n i m r e T
r o t c e n n o c
l a c i r e m u n / t l u s e r t n e m g d u J
t u p t u o e u l a v
t u p n i ) G R T ( r e g g i r T
Y / X e u l a v e t a n i d r o o C
n e h w y l n O ( ) T S P ( n o i t c e l e s
e g d e r o h c r a e s n r e t t a p
Y d n a X e h t h t o b n i h c r a e s
) . t e s s i s n o i t c e r i d
6 5 1
e t o m e r e h t g u l p n U
m o r f e l o s n o c l o r t n o c
. r e l l o r t n o c e h t
e l o s n o C t u p n i r e g g i r T
n o i t c e l e s n e e r c S
r o f n o i t c e l e s . o N w o d n i W
t u p t u o a t a d / y a l p s i d
n o i t c e l e s M A R G O R P / N U R
2 5 1
" r c 0 R " e h t d n e S
V C e h t n e h w d n a m m o c
n o i t a c i n u m m o c n i s i
. e d o m
C 2 3 2 - S R t u p n i r e g g i r T
t u p t u o a t a D
7 8 1
N U R
l a n r e t x E (
) l o r t n o c
e h t n i E G N A H C t e S
g n i t t e s l a t n e m n o r i v n e
E L O S N O C o t u n e m
e h t t e s n e h t d n a
h c t i w s e d i l s s e l o s n o c
. N U R o t
/ l a n i m r e T
r o t c e n n o c
l a c i r e m u n / t l u s e r t n e m g d u J
t u p t u o e u l a v
t u p n i ) G R T ( r e g g i r T
Y / X e u l a v e t a n i d r o o C
n e h w y l n O ( ) T S P ( n o i t c e l e s
e g d e r o h c r a e s n r e t t a p
Y d n a X e h t h t o b n i h c r a e s
w o d n i W ) . t e s s i s n o i t c e r i d
r o f n o i t c e l e s . o N
) x l W ( t u p t u o a t a d / y a l p s i d
6 5 1
e t o m e r e h t g u l p n U
m o r f e l o s n o c l o r t n o c
. r e l l o r t n o c e h t
e l o s n o C t u p n i r e g g i r T
n o i t c e l e s n e e r c S
n o i t c e l e s M A R G O R P / N U R
2 5 1
" r c 0 R " e h t d n e S
V C e h t n e h w d n a m m o c
n o i t a c i n u m m o c n i s i
. e d o m
C 2 3 2 - S R t u p n i r e g g i r T
t u p t u o a t a D
7 8 1
n e e r c S
n o i t a r t s i g e r
1 C E R e h t t i u c r i c - t r o h S
2 M O C d n a 2 C E R
V C e h t n e h w s l a n i m r e t
N U R r o N U R n i s i
. e d o m ] T X E [
/ l a n i m r e T
r o t c e n n o c
y B ( n o i t a r t s i g e r n e e r c S
G R T e h t g n i t i u c r i c - t r o h s
) . s l a n i m r e t 1 M O C d n a
4 6 1
- i n u m m o C
n o i t a c
" r c 0 O " e h t d n e S
. d n a m m o c
C 2 3 2 - S R t u p t u o g n i t i r w / g n i d a e R
g n i t t e s
g n i t t e s g n i t i r w / g n i d a e R
a t a d
d e r e t s i g e r g n i t i r w / g n i d a e R
n e e r c s
m a r g o r p g n i t i r w / g n i d a e R
r e b m u n
n o i t a r t s i g e r n e e r c S
n e e r c s t u p n i g n i d a e R
a t a d g n i t t e s g n i v a S
8 8 1
5.2 Controls Available in RUN Mode
In RUN mode, the CV-701(P)/751(P) can be controlled using external signals
through the I/O terminals and RS-232C.
Chapter 5 Operation
154 154
5
MEMO
Chapter 6
I/O Timing and Analog Output
Explains the input/output timing and analog output.
6.1 I/O Terminal Names and Functions.................................. 156
6.2 Input/Output Timing Diagrams ......................................... 160
6.3 I/O Circuit ............................................................................ 165
6.4 Analog Output .................................................................... 166
6.4.1 Analog output terminals ....................................................... 166
6.4.2 Changing analog output settings ......................................... 166
6.4.3 Scaling the analog output .................................................... 167
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
156 156
6
6.1 I/O Terminal Names and Functions
This section describes the names and functions of I/O terminals/connectors and
the position of analog output.
The position of I/O terminals
Names and functions of I/O terminals and I/O connectors
I/O terminal
I/O terminal
Analog
output
I/O terminal
I/O connector
Analog
output
I/O connector
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Terminal No. (controller side)
. o N l a n i m r e T e m a n l a n g i S n o i t p i r c s e D
1 C D V 4 2 t u p n i y l p p u s r e w o p C D V 4 2
2 V 0 t u p n i y l p p u s r e w o p r o f V 0
3 . w o l e b e l b a t e h t e e S
4 G R T l a n g i s g n i m i t r o f t u p n i r e g g i r T
5 . w o l e b e l b a t e h t e e S
6 . w o l e b e l b a t e h t e e S
7 1 O W t u p t u o r o t a r a p m o c 1 w o d n i W
8 2 O W t u p t u o r o t a r a p m o c 2 w o d n i W
9 3 O W t u p t u o r o t a r a p m o c 3 w o d n i W
0 1 4 O W t u p t u o r o t a r a p m o c 4 w o d n i W
1 1 5 O W t u p t u o r o t a r a p m o c 5 w o d n i W
2 1 6 O W t u p t u o r o t a r a p m o c 6 w o d n i W
3 1 7 O W t u p t u o r o t a r a p m o c 7 w o d n i W
4 1 8 O W t u p t u o r o t a r a p m o c 8 w o d n i W
5 1 R O W 8 O W o t 1 O W f o t u p t u o R O
CAUTION
COM1 terminals 3 and 6 are common.
Terminal 0 V (for power supply input), COM1, and COM2 are common via a
choke coil. Be sure that there is no potential difference among the three
terminals.
NPN (CV-701/751)
3 1 M O C
r o f ) V 0 ( l a n g i s n o m m o C
s t u p t u o / s t u p n i
5 O T S t u p t u o r o f t u p t u o l a n g i s e b o r t S
6 1 M O C
r o f ) V 0 ( l a n g i s n o m m o C
s t u p t u o / s t u p n i
PNP (CV-701P/751P)
3 V1
t u p t u o P N P r o f y l p p u s r e w o P
) V 4 2 o t 5 (
5 1 M O C
r o f ) V 0 ( l a n g i s n o m m o C
s t u p t u o / s t u p n i
6 O T S t u p t u o r o f t u p t u o l a n g i s e b o r t S
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
157
6
I/O connector
COM2 terminals 6, 7, 22, and 23 are common.
* The colors represent the cable colors used in the special I/O cable (option: OP-
35341).
Data outputs (D0 to D12) are 13-bit binary outputs (negative-true logic).
D0 (LSB) to D12 (MSB) signals are in one-to-one correspondence with
1.2.4.84096, and they read data by doing sums of the terminals that are turned
on.
For screen registration input TRG with the REC (1 and/or 2) input.
Simultaneous inputs of REC 1/2 and CONT show the raw screen with a cross-shaped
cursor in the center.
Connector pin No. (controller side)
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
22
7
23
8
24
9
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
13
29
14
30
15
31
16
32
. o N n i P
l a n g i S
e m a n
n o i t p i r c s e D
e l b a C
* r o l o c
1 ) d e s u e b o t t o n ( l a n i m r e t t u p n I n w o r B
2 0 I C ) B S L ( 0 t u p n i . o N m a r g o r P d e R
3 1 I C 1 t u p n i . o N m a r g o r P e g n a r O
4 2 I C 2 t u p n i . o N m a r g o r P w o l l e Y
5 3 I C ) B S M ( 3 t u p n i . o N m a r g o r P n e e r G
6 2 M O C s t u p t u o / s t u p n i r o f ) V 0 ( l a n g i s n o m m o C e u l B
7 2 M O C s t u p t u o / s t u p n i r o f ) V 0 ( l a n g i s n o m m o C e l p r u P
8 0 D ) B S L ( 0 t u p t u o a t a D y a r G
9 1 D 1 t u p t u o a t a D e t i h W
0 1 2 D 2 t u p t u o a t a D k c a l B
1 1 3 D 3 t u p t u o a t a D n w o r B
2 1 4 D 4 t u p t u o a t a D d e R
3 1 5 D 5 t u p t u o a t a D e g n a r O
4 1 6 D 6 t u p t u o a t a D w o l l e Y
5 1 7 D 7 t u p t u o a t a D n e e r G
6 1 8 D 8 t u p t u o a t a D e u l B
7 1 9 D 9 t u p t u o a t a D e l p r u P
8 1 0 1 D 0 1 t u p t u o a t a D y a r G
9 1 1 1 D 1 1 t u p t u o a t a D e t i h W
0 2 2 1 D ) B S M ( 2 1 t u p t u o a t a D k c a l B
1 2 E L O P . P
t u p t u o n g i s a t a d n o i t i s o P
) l a n g i s e v i t a g e n n o p u t u p t u o (
n w o r B
2 2 . w o l e b e l b a t e h t e e S
3 2 . w o l e b e l b a t e h t e e S
4 2 T S P t u p n i n o i t c e l e s t u p t u o a t a D w o l l e Y
5 2 0 I W
0 t u p n i n o i t c e l e s w o d n i w t u p t u o d n a y a l p s i D
) B S L (
n e e r G
6 2 1 I W 1 t u p n i n o i t c e l e s w o d n i w t u p t u o d n a y a l p s i D e u l B
7 2 2 I W 2 t u p n i n o i t c e l e s w o d n i w t u p t u o d n a y a l p s i D e l p r u P
8 2 T N O C
s i m a r g o r p a n e h W ( t u p n i n o i t a r e p o s u o u n i t n o C
n a t u o h t i w s t r a t s t n e m g d u j s u o u n i t n o c , d e h c t i w s
) . l a n g i s r e g g i r t l a n r e t x e
y a r G
9 2 Y S U B t u p t u o l a n g i s Y S U B e t i h W
0 3 1 C E R 1 a r e m a C t u p n i n o i t a r t s i g e r n e e r c S k c a l B
1 3 2 C E R 2 a r e m a C t u p n i n o i t a r t s i g e r n e e r c S n w o r B
2 3 l a n i m r e t d e s u n U d e R
Tips
NPN (CV-701/751) PNP (CV-701P/751P)
2 2 2 M O C
) V 0 ( l a n g i s n o m m o C
s t u p t u o / s t u p n i r o f
d e R
3 2 2 M O C
) V 0 ( l a n g i s n o m m o C
s t u p t u o / s t u p n i r o f
e g n a r O
2 2 l a n i m r e t d e s u n U d e R
3 2 l a n i m r e t d e s u n U e g n a r O
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
158 158
6
Binary data input (Output window selection input)
Binary data output format from D0 to D12
The format of binary data output varies depending on the measurement mode.
Note: The data output from the terminals is not binary-converted.
1. The nth bit of output data
2. Point n
3. 1: ON/ 0: OFF
4. The decimal point is not output. (The ten-times value of the displayed value is output.)
t u p n I
. o N w o d n i W
0 W 1 W 2 W
F F O F F O F F O 1
N O F F O F F O 2
F F O N O F F O 3
N O N O F F O 4
F F O F F O N O 5
N O F F O N O 6
F F O N O N O 7
N O N O N O 8
e d o M e d o m - b u S
T S P
n o i t c e l e S
a t a d t u p t u O
A E R A
n e p O . a t a d d e r u s a e m A E R A f o s t i b 3 1 t s a l e h T
d e s o l C . a t a d d e r u s a e m A E R A f o s t i b 3 1 t s r i f e h T
E G D E
/ R E T U O
R E N N I
n e p O s t n e m e r u s a e m e g d E
d e s o l C s t n e m e r u s a e m e g d E
H C T I P / P A G
n e p O e u l a v e g a r e v a h c t i P
d e s o l C e u l a v e g a r e v a h c t i P
O N E G D E
n e p O r e b m u n e g d E
d e s o l C r e b m u n e g d E
T N U O C
n e p O r e b m u n t n u o C
d e s o l C r e b m u n t n u o C
T N I O P
n e p O n D
. 1
n P :
. 2
] r o l o c n o i t c a r t x e : N O , d n u o r g k c a b : F F O [
. 3
d e s o l C n D f o t l u s e r n o i t c e t e d e h T
. 1
n P :
. 2
: N O , x : F F O [ ]
. 3
N I A T S
n e p O a t a d d e r u s a e M
d e s o l C a t a d d e r u s a e M
Y T I V A R G
n e p O t n i o p d e t c e t e d e h t f o e t a n i d r o o c X
d e s o l C t n i o p d e t c e t e d e h t f o e t a n i d r o o c Y
T T A P
n e p O t n i o p d e t c e t e d e h t f o e t a n i d r o o c X
d e s o l C t n i o p d e t c e t e d e h t f o e t a n i d r o o c Y
E G D E
E D O M
n e p O t n i o p d e t c e t e d e h t f o e t a n i d r o o c X
d e s o l C t n i o p d e t c e t e d e h t f o e t a n i d r o o c Y
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
159
6
Point sensor (Supplemental)
The status of each point (extracted color/non-extracted color) is output when the
PST terminal is open.
The detection result of each point is output when the PST terminal is short-cir-
cuited. (Turns ON when the results agree with the [SET] of each point.)
Point 1 to 8 output data corresponding to D0 to D7.
P1, P2, ... P8
! ! !
D0, D2 ... D7
Analog output
Use the special cable (OP-41420) for connection.
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
160 160
6
6.2 Input/Output Timing Diagrams
This section describes the timing diagrams in RUN mode for each measurement
mode.
ARE/CON timing
The process is repeated every 1/30 of a second.
The RS-232C output skips at a given interval. (The output cycle varies depend-
ing on the number of windows and the baud rate setting.)
RS-232C data transmission is stopped when the CONT is short-circuited.
20ms
ON
OFF
BUSY
RS-232C
OUTPUT
CONT
WO1 to WO8
Internal
trigger
WOR
ANALOG
OUTPUT
ON
OFF
STO
1
1
1
1 4
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
1/30 sec.
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
161
6
INS/TRG and INS+POS timing
At the moment of the TRG signal input, the STO output is turned off, and the
BUSY output is turned on.
When the TRG signal is input and the judgment result is determined, the out-
puts of WO1 to WO8 and WOR are provided, and the STO output is turned on.
The previous judgment output is retained during the processing time. The RS-
232C data transmission is also activated.
The window data outputs (D0 to D12) show the data for the windows specified
with the output window selection inputs (WI0 to WI2). The settings of WI0 to
WI2 are effective even after the judgment result is determined. The STO output
is turned off during the output window selection. Read the data while the STO
output is on.
To select windows using the WI0 to WI2 input signals, set CHANGE in the
environmental setting menu to TERMINAL.
Limit the rising time variation of the binary data of WI0 to WI2 to 3 ms or less.
The TRG input is accepted during RS-232C communication to start new pro-
cessing. The RS-232C communication output is continued.
The TRG input and the communication command are not accepted while the
BUSY output is on.
The STO output is turned off during the period between the first TRG input after
power on, RUN mode selection or program number selection, and the determi-
nation of the judgment result.
When the data transmission period of RS-232C communication is 33 ms or
less, the period while the BUSY output is on or the processing time does not
include RS-232C transmission time. It shifts to TRG waiting status after turning
off the BUSY output at the end of the processing time. The transmission time
varies with the number of windows, output settings ( See page 182), and the
baud rate setting.
1 ms min.
ON
OFF
BUSY
D0 to D12
TRG
WO1 to WO8
WOR
ON
OFF
STO
100 ms
ON
OFF
WI0 to WI2
ANALOG
OUTOPUT
4 ms
2 ms
4 ms
2 ms
Processing time
(T=00000)
232C
data
RS-232C data
transmission
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
162 162
6
ABS. POS and REL. POS timing
When the TRG signal is input and the judgment result is determined, the out-
puts of WO1 and WOR are provided and the STO output is turned on. The
previous judgment output is retained during the processing time.
For the position data output, the X coordinate is output while the PST input is
off, and the Y coordinate is output while the PST input is on. The PST input is
effective after the judgment result is determined. While the X and Y coordinates
are switched, the STO output is turned off. Read the data while the STO output
is on.
The STO output is turned off during the period between the first TRG input after
power-on, RUN mode selection or program number selection, and the determi-
nation of the judgment result.
Program number selection timing
Continuous operation: OFF
To select a program number using the I/O terminal, set CHANGE in the
environmental setting menu to TERMINAL.
The average program selection time is 230 ms. It depends on the settings.
Limit the rising time variation of the binary data of a program number selection
input to 3 ms or less.
The CI0 to CI3 are level-locked.
1 ms min.
ON
OFF
BUSY
D0 to D12
P.POLE
TRG
ON
OFF
STO
100 ms 15 ms min.
10 ms
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PST
4 ms 4 ms 1 ms
4 ms
2 ms
WO1 to WO4
WOR
WI0 to WI2
ANALOG
OUTOPUT
Processing time
(T=00000)
232C
data
RS-232C data
transmission
X-coordinate Y-coordinate X-coordinate X-coordinate
ON
OFF
BUSY
CI0 to CI3
Program No. 2 Program No. 1
Program No.
Program No. 2 Program No. 1
Program selection time Program selection time
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
163
6
Continuous operation: ON
When the program number is externally selected while the CONT input is on,
the stored image is processed again with the new settings.
To turn on CONT input, set CHANGE in the environmental setting menu to
TERMINAL.
The average program selection time is 230 ms. It depends on the settings.
Limit the rising time variation of the binary data of a program number selection
input to 3 ms or less.
The CI0 to CI3 are level-locked.
The menu screen does not reflect continuous operation. Only the message
CONT appears on the screen. The menu screen shows the measured value of
the program number processed at the TRG input.
Continuous operation is completed when the program number returns to the
number that was being processed when the TRG signal was input.
When CONT is off during operation, the display is changed to the program No.
and continuous operation is terminated.
The WOR output is the OR output with all windows specified in continuous
operation.
When CONT is input, the message CONT is shown at the bottom of the
screen.
* The AUTO SEQUENCE mode is provided to process the operations of several
preset programs sequentially by automatically switching the program numbers
without any control of the I/O input.
Refer to Environmental Settings on page 144 for details.
TRG
ON
OFF
BUSY
ON
OFF
STO
CI1 to CI3
ON
OFF
CONT
ON
OFF
Program No. 0 Program No. 2 Program No. 1 Program No. 0 Program No.
Program No. 0 Program No. 1 Program No. 2 Program No. 0
Program selection time +
processing time (20 ms min.)
Program selection time +
processing time (20 ms min.)
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
164 164
6
Timing under AUTO SEQUENCE mode
At the moment the TRG input is turned on, the AUTO SEQUENCE mode starts
processing. BUSY is turned on at the moment of TRG input, and it is turned off
when the processing is completed.
STO is turned off when TRG input is turned on, and it is turned on when the
processing is completed and the judgment result is determined for each win-
dow.
The judgment result varies with each program number. The previous judgment
output is retained during processing.
The total processing time is the period that BUSY is on.
The WOR output is turned on when a window is judged as unacceptable in all of
the settings.
The characters ATSQ are shown at the bottom of the screen.
The processing of judgment result
To judge one unacceptable result as unacceptable, check the common falling
points of both WOR output and BUSY.
If judgment results for each window of each program number are required,
check the judgment output status with the PLC at every STO rising after the
TRG (BUSY) rising. The number of STO risings after TRG input indicates the
program number.
Screen registration timing (RUN mode)
When the CONT terminal is short-circuited while REC1/REC2 is short-circuited,
the RAW SCREEN is displayed and the screen updates without TRG inputs. A
cross-shaped cursor appears on the screen. During this period, the screen is
not registered even when TRG signal is input.
TRG
STO
BUSY
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
15 ms min. 15 ms min.
Program No. 0
setting confirmed
Program No. 1
setting confirmed
Program
selection
status
Judgment
WO1 to WO8
No. 0
No. 2 No. 1
Program No. 2
setting confirmed
Program No. 0
REC1
REC2
TRG
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
BUSY
Preparation for
screen registration
REC1: CAM1
REC2: CAM2
Screen
registration
Preparation for
operation
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
165
6
COM1
IN
+24 V
3 k"
470 "
IN
1.5 k"
+5 V
2.2 k"
COM2
6.3 I/O Circuit
This section describes specifications and circuit diagrams for each terminal.
Input circuit diagram
NPN model
PNP model
Output circuit diagram
NPN model
PNP model
Terminal 0 V (for power supply input), COM1, and COM2 are common via a
choke coil. Be sure that there is no potential difference among the three
terminals.
CAUTION
IN
COM1
3 k"
470 "
IN
COM2
8.2 k"
3 k"
Terminal name: TRG
ON voltage: 10 V max. (PNP 10 V min.)
ON current: 3 mA min.
OFF voltage: 17 V min. (PNP 5 V max.)
OFF current: 2 mA max. (PNP 1.5 mA max.)
Terminal name: CI0 to CI3, PST, REC1 to
2, CONT, WI0 to WI2
ON voltage: 1.5 V max. (PNP 10 V min.)
ON current: 1.5 mA min.
OFF voltage: 3 V min. (PNP 3 V max.)
OFF current: 0.1 mA max.
COM1
NPN
OUT
COM2
NPN
OUT
Terminal name: D0 to D12, P.POLE,
BUSY
Maximum applied voltage: 30 V
Maximum sink current: 10 mA
Residual voltage: 1 V max.
Leakage current: 0.1 mA max.
Terminal name: STO, WO1 to WO8, WOR
Maximum applied voltage: 30 V
Maximum sink current: 50 mA
Residual voltage: 1 V max.
Leakage current: 0.1 mA max.
V1
PNP
OUT
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
166 166
6
6.4 Analog Output
6.4.1 Analog output terminals
Connection
Connect the CV-701(P)/751(P) to the analog output device using a special cable
(OP-41420).
Analog output
Analog output bound: 0 to 4.095 V
Analog output resolution: 12 bits
Output impedance: 100 "
Analog output precision: 2 % of F.S.
GND for analog output, video output, and camera housing are common via a
coil. Be sure that there is no potential difference among the three terminals.
6.4.2 Changing analog output settings
The analog output of a measured value is available (output to a mini plug) in a
range of 0 to 4 V. The analog output can be converted to an output voltage value
by using a scaling method. The parameters of analog output can be set for each
window. When the CV is in RUN mode, the voltage of the current measurement
window is output.
When the CV is operated with the initial settings, output voltage corresponds to the
displayed measured value. For example, when 200.0 is displayed, the output voltage
will be 2 V.
When the CV is in PROGRAM mode, the output is always 0 V regardless of the
displayed value.
Analog output terminal
CAUTION
Tips
100 "
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
167
6
6.4.3 Scaling the analog output
Set the scaling of analog output for each window.
This section describes a setting to output the X value of [ABS.POS] measurement
mode.
1. Place the cursor on [WIND1] in the main menu and press the [ENT] key.
The window selection menu appears.
2. Select a window to change the analog output setting and press the [ENT]
key.
The window menu appears.
3. Place the cursor on [ANALOG] and press the [ENT] key.
The list of setting parameters appears.
4. Select a desired parameter to be output. Select [X] here.
5. Press the [ENT] key.
The scaling setting menu appears.
Scaling method
Set the monitor output value for the corresponding two desired points to perform
scaling.
6. Set [DATA H]. Place the cursor on [DATA H] and press the [ENT] key.
The first digit is shown as highlighted. You can enter a numerical value.
SHUTTER
SCRN REG
WIND1
WIND1
WIND1
WIND2
WIND3
WIND4
FIT= 00
ANALOG
T=
FIT= 00
X
Y
ANG
FIT
4
(V) (V)
0 400.0
2
0 400.0
Displayed
value
After scaling Before scaling
Analog output Analog output
Displayed
value
SET
DATA H (400.0) ANALOG H (2.000)
DATA L (0) ANALOG L (0)
ANALOG X
DATA H +4000.00
#ANALOG H 4.000
DATA L +0000.00
#ANALOG L 0.000
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
168 168
6
ANALOG X
DATA H +4000.00
#ANALOG H 4.000
DATA L +0000.00
#ANALOG L 0.000
ANALOG X
DATA H +4000.00
#ANALOG H 4.000
DATA L +0000.00
#ANALOG L 0.000
ANALOG X
DATA H +4000.00
#ANALOG H 2.000
DATA L +0000.00
#ANALOG L 0.000
Tips
7. Move the [ENT] key to the right and left to select a digit to be changed.
8. Change the value.
With the panel keys
Press the []/[] cursor key repeatedly.
With the remote control console
Press the [ENT] key up or down repeatedly.
When [] cursor is pressed repeatedly, the value increments by one from 0.
After 9, the second digit is incremented.
When [] cursor is pressed or the [ENT] key is pressed down repeatedly, the
value decrements by one until it reaches 0. After 0, the second digit is
decremented.
9. Press the [ENT] key to confirm the setting.
10. Set [ANALOG H], [DATA L], and [ANALOG L] with the same procedure for
[DATA H] described in steps 5 to 8.
11. Press the [ESCAPE] key after setting all of the parameters and return to
the window menu.
The setting of analog output is complete.
Note: When there are two or more output parameters (e.g. X-/Y-coordinates), the
parameter last set will be output. The in step 3 indicates the current selection.
When INS mode is set to GAP or PITCH, the average of the measured value is
output.
The setting of analog output can be changed for each window. To set several
windows, select another window number and follow the above procedure (Steps 1
to 10).
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
169
6
s r e t e m a r a p t u p t u O
N O C / E R A s l e x i p f o r e b m u N
, G R T / E R A
S O P + S N I
E R A e u l a v d e r u s a e M
R E T U O e u l a v d e r u s a e M
R E N N I e u l a v d e r u s a e M
P A G h c t i p - p a g f o e g a r e v A
H C T I P h c t i p - r e t n e c f o e g a r e v A
O N E G D E e g d e f o r e b m u N
T N U O C t n u o c f o r e b m u N
T N I O P t u p t u o o N
N I A T S e u l a v d e r u s a e M
Y T I V A R G e u l a v d e r u s a e M
, S O P . S B A
S O P . L E R
T T A P o i t a r n o i t a l e r r o c , e l g n a n o i t c e t e d , s e t a n i d r o o c - Y / - X
E G D E s e t a n i d r o o c - Y / - X
Chapter 6 I/O Timing and Analog Output
170 170
6
MEMO
Chapter 7
CompactFlash Memory
This section describes how to use the CompactFlash memory with the CV-
701(P)/751(P).
7.1 Mounting and Dismounting the CompactFlash
Memory ............................................................................... 172
7.1.1 Mounting the CompactFlash memory .................................. 172
7.1.2 Dismounting the CompactFlash memory............................. 172
7.2 Reading of Data to a Personal Computer ........................ 173
7.3 How to Use CompactFlash Memory................................. 174
7.3.1 Parameter descriptions ........................................................ 174
7.3.2 Saving the setting in CompactFlash memory ...................... 175
Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory
172 172
7
7.1 Mounting and Dismounting the CompactFlash Memory
CompactFlash memory can be used with the CV-701(P)/751(P).
This section describes how to use the CompactFlash memory.
7.1.1 Mounting the CompactFlash memory
Insert a CompactFlash memory as illustrated.
7.1.2 Dismounting the CompactFlash memory
Press the EJECT button to remove the CompactFlash memory from the CV-
701(P)/751(P).
Do not remove the CompactFlash memory while accessing it. Otherwise, the
data and/or CompactFlash memory may be damaged.
Note: Use KEYENCE optional NR-M32 CompactFlash memory.
3
1
2
Position the CompactFlash memory
observing the correct orientation.
2
1
EJECT button
CAUTION
Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory
173 173
7
7.2 Reading of Data to a Personal Computer
The data saved on a 32-MB CompactFlash memory (option: NR-M32) can be
recorded on other media such as hard disks and CompactFlash memory, etc.
1. Mount a 32-MB CompactFlash memory (option: NR-M32) to a PCMCIA
adapter (option: C-A1), and then insert into a PC-card slot of a notebook
personal computer.
* When the CompactFlash memory is not recognized by the system, refer to
the following procedures.
Recognition of a CompactFlash memory
A simple setup procedure is required when a CompactFlash memory is used for
the first time. Follow the procedure shown below for the setup. (The display
screen may vary slightly with the PC models and different versions of Windows.)
Procedures
1. When inserting a CompactFlash memory to the PC-card slot of a personal
computer for the first time the display screen below will automatically appear.
A driver file for CompactFlash memory comes standard with Windows. Addi-
tional devices such as FD are not required.
2. Click [Finish].
The setup for the CompactFlash memory driver is complete.
2. Open My Computer from the desktop and double-click on the icon named
as Nr_m32_8 for the CompactFlash memory drive. The saved data will
be displayed.
3. When saving the data to different media, drag and drop the data to the
desired media to copy them.
Files with the extension .bmp can be opened with image processing software (Windows
Accessory, Paint, etc.).
1
2
PCMCIA adapter
Tips
Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory
174 174
7
7.3 How to Use CompactFlash Memory
The following three types of data can be stored in CompactFlash memory.
BASE SET: Environmental setting data
WINDOW SET: Setting data
SCREEN: Saved screen
Up to 16 setting data and registered screens and 8 [SVD SCRN] screens can be
saved on the internal memory of the CV-701(P)/751(P). Use CompactFlash
memory to save more settings and screens.
The settings, registered screens and saved screens can be saved in a PC by using an RS-
232C communication interface.
7.3.1 Parameter descriptions
FILE TYPE
Select a file type from the following three types. Select the desired file type to be
set.
BASE SET: Environmental setting data (1 KB)
WINDOW SET: Setting data, registered screen (16 settings: approx. 4.2 MB)
NG SCREEN: Saved screen
ACTION
Select the desired action to be executed from the following six items.
Select an item in [ACTION] and choose [EXECUTE].
SAVE : Save the selection of setting data, registered screens and save
screens in CompactFlash memory.
LOAD : Read the selection of setting data, registered screens and save
screens from CompactFlash memory.
DELETE : Delete the selected files from CompactFlash memory.
SAVE BMP : Save the saved screen in CompactFlash memory in bitmap
format.
DELETE BMP: Delete saved screens in bitmap format from CompactFlash
memory.
UPDATE LIST: Update the list of files saved in CompactFlash memory.
Note 1: The CV processes the set of registered screens and setting data for 16
programs as a single unit. The program numbers are not processed individually in
SAVE and LOAD operation.
Note 2: Save data in RAW format before saving files in bitmap format.
SELECT
Select the saved screen.
The display is shown only when [NG SCREEN] is selected in [FILE TYPE].
Tips
Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory
175 175
7
FILE NAME
The name of the file.
The format of a file name is as follows.
(File type) (Number). (Extension)
BS 000 DAT
The numerical values can be changed from 0 to 999.
The file type and extension are defined automatically.
is shown next to the file name when the saved screen file in stored in bitmap
form.
BS 000 .DAT : Environmental setting data
WS 000 .CV7 : Setting data, registered screen data
NG 000 .RAW: Saved screen data
NG 000 .BMP : Saved screen data in bitmap format
LABEL
The characters are set to the file as an identification label. Up to ten characters can
be designated.
EXECUTE
Press the [ENT] key to execute the actions set in the [ACTION] menu.
7.3.2 Saving the setting in CompactFlash memory
This section describes the procedure to save the settings in CompactFlash
memory.
The procedure can be applied to the saving of other data.
1. Display the environmental setting menu.
Refer to page 144 to display the environmental setting menu.
2. Place the cursor on [MEMORY CARD] and press the [ENT] key.
3. The CompactFlash memory menu is displayed.
4. Change the file type settings. Place the cursor on [FILE TYPE] and press
the [ENT] key.
The cursor moves to the right column automatically. You can change the
setting.
MEMORY CARD
WHITE BALANCE
SETUP MENU
CHANGE CONSOLE
OUT MODE N.O.
RS232C BPS 38400
RS232C OUT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
LANGUAGE JAPANESE
OUTPUT SYMBOL COLOR
AUTO OFF OFF
TRIGGER EXTERNAL
SAVE SCR OFF
COPY NO. No.00 TO No.00
AUTO SEQUENCE OFF NUM 4
CLOCK 00/03/30
06:46:46
FILE TYPE WINDOW SET.
ACTION UPDATE LIST
FILE NAME WS000 .CV7
LABEL
EXECUTE
o : WITH BMP
FILENAME DATE TIME LABEL
Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory
176 176
7
5. Change the file type.
Select [WINDOW SET].
With the panel keys
Press the []/[] cursor keys.
With the remote control console
Press the [ENT] key up or down.
6. Press the [ENT] key to confirm the setting.
7. Set the [ACTION].
Refer to steps 4 to 6 to select and confirm the [SAVE].
8. Select the [FILE NAME]. Place the cursor on [FILE NAME] and press the
[ENT] key.
The cursor goes to the first digit of the [FILE NAME] automatically. You can
change the numerical value.
9. The numerical value of [WS000.CV7] for [FILE NAME] can be changed.
10. Move the cursor to the left or right to select the desired digit to be
changed.
11. Change the numerical value.
With the panel keys
Press the []/[] cursor keys repeatedly.
With the remote control console
Press the [ENT] key up or down repeatedly.
The value increments by one from 0 every time the [] cursor is pressed.
After 9, the value returns to 0. When [] cursor is pressed or the [ENT] key
is move down repeatedly, the value decrements by one to 0. After 0, the
value returns to 9.
12. Press the [ENT] key to confirm the [FILE NAME].
When files are already stored in the CompactFlash memory, place the cursor on the file
name in the list and press the [ENT] key to confirm the selection.
FILE TYPE WINDOW SET.
ACTION UPDATE LIST
FILE NAME BS000 .DAT
LABEL
EXECUTE
FILE NAME WS000 .CV7
LABEL
EXECUTE
Tips
Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory
177 177
7
13. Set the [LABEL]. Place the cursor on [LABEL] and press the [ENT] key.
The keyboard menu appears on the screen.
14. A green frame appears on the 0 in the keyboard menu. Move the frame
to the desired character to be set.
With the panel keys
Press the [][][ ][ ] cursor keys to move the frame in the desired direction.
With the remote control console
Move the [ENT] key in the desired direction to move the frame in the respective
direction.
15. Press the [ENT] key to input the character with the frame to [LABEL].
Up to ten characters can be designated for the [LABEL]. The digits of the
current selection are shown underlined in green. To alter the digit to be
changed, select the [ ]/[ ] on the lower- right corner of the screen and press
the [ENT] key. The underline moves to the right or left. Press [CLEAR] key to
delete underlined characters.
16. After setting the [LABEL], move the frame to [END] on the lower-right
corner of the keyboard menu and press the [ENT] key.
17. Check the defined settings and execute.
Place the cursor on [EXECUTE] and press the [ENT] key.
Note 1: Make sure that the CompactFlash memory is inserted before the execu-
tion. When the CompactFlash memory card is not inserted before the execution,
the error message PLEASE INSERT CF CARD. appears on the screen. Press
the [ESCAPE] key to dismiss the error message. Insert the CompactFlash memory
card and try the execution again.
Note 2: Do not insert/eject the CompactFlash memory during execution.
18. After the settings are confirmed, press the [ESCAPE] key to return to the
environmental setting menu.
Press the [ESCAPE] key again to return to the setting menu.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A B C D E F G H I J
K L M N O P Q R S T
U VWX Y Z . / :
# END
FILE NAME WS000 .CV7
LABEL
EXECUTE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A B C D E F G H I J
K L M N O P Q R S T
U VWX Y Z . / :
# END
T_

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A B C D E F G H I J
K L M N O P Q R S T
U VWX Y Z . / :
# END
TEST_
FILE NAME WS000 .CV7
LABEL TEST
EXECUTE
Chapter 7 CompactFlash Memory
178 178
7
MEMO
Chapter 8
RS-232C Interface
This section describes the connection between the CV-701(P)/751(P) and a
personal computer.
8.1 Overview............................................................................. 180
8.1.1 Specifications....................................................................... 180
8.2 Connection ......................................................................... 181
8.3 Commands and Data Formats .......................................... 182
8.3.1 Commands in PROGRAM mode ......................................... 182
8.3.2 Commands for CompactFlash memory ............................... 187
8.3.3 Commands in RUN mode.................................................... 188
8.3.4 Output data format ............................................................... 189
8.3.5 Command list ....................................................................... 193
8.3.6 Applications of RS-232C communication setting ................. 194
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
180 180
8
8.1 Overview
The CV-701(P)/751(P) features an RS-232C interface.
This section describes the communication commands using RS-232C.
The communication function enables the following controls and data outputs:
Select the operation mode (PROGRAM/RUN mode selection).
Read and write programs.
Register the screen.
Read and write the registered screen.
Read the input screen.
Read and write the set values.
Read the saved screen.
Input trigger signals.
Select the output data (judgment result, number of pixels, coordinates, correla-
tion ratio, angle).
Read the output data selection.
Output data.
Re-output data.
Read and write the CompactFlash memory.
8.1.1 Specifications
Same as a modem that conforms to the EIA (Electronic Industries Association) RS-
232C
Refer to page 143 for the baud rate adjustment.
Refer to page 182 for the commands and data formats.
Duplex Full
Synchronization Start/stop
Data format ASCII
Data length 8 bits
Stop bit length 1 bit
Parity check None
Baud rate 9600/19200/38400 bps
Data delimiter CR
X parameter Only with binary data-responses
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
181
8
8.2 Connection
Connection with a PC
Connect the CV-701(P)/751(P) to a personal computer using a special cable OP-
27221 (Cable length: 3 m)
Connection
Pin assignment Wiring (special cable)
OUT VIDEO
I/O
CAMERA
2
25-pin
D-sub connector
PC
OP-27221
(Cable length: 3 m)
4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3
SD (TXD)
RD (RXD)
SG (GND)
SD (TXD)
RD (RXD)
SG (GND)
RS (RTS)
CS (CTS)
DR (DSR)
CD (DCD)
ER (DTR)
25-pin 9-pin
2
3
2
3
7
4
5
6
8
20
3
2
5
7
8
6
1
4
4
PC side
CV side
CV
OP-25057 for
9-pin connector
Ferite core
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
182 182
8
8.3 Commands and Data Formats
This section describes the commands and data formats used for RS-232C commu-
nication.
8.3.1 Commands in PROGRAM mode
Send O0 [Cr] to the CV-701(P)/751(P) to stop operation.
After writing data, send SS [Cr] to the CV-701(P)/751(P) to save the settings. If the power
is turned off without saving the settings, the setting data will be lost.
Reading the program number
The current program number is sent back to the PC.
Command
Response
NUM: Program No. (00 to 15)
Writing the program number
The current program is changed to the number specified with the PC.
Command
Response
NUM: Program No. (00 to 15)
Error
Reading output settings
The current output data selection (judgment result, number of pixels, measured
value of edge detection, X coordinate, Y coordinate, correlation ratio, and rotation
angle) is sent back to the PC. The initial settings for all data are 0.
Command
Response
Data 0: Output setting of judgment result (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Data 1: Output setting of number of pixels (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Data 2: Output setting of the measured value of the INS mode (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Data 3: Output setting of X coordinate (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Data 4: Output setting of Y coordinate (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Data 5: Output setting of correlation ratio (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Data 6: Output setting of rotation angle (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Tips
P R cr
P R cr ,
NUM
1
NUM
2
P W cr ,
NUM
1
NUM
2
P W cr
E R , P W , #1#2 cr
A R cr
A R , cr
NUM
1
NUM
0
NUM
2
NUM
3
NUM
4
NUM
5
NUM
6
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
183
8
Writing output settings
Select the output data (judgment result, number of pixels, measured value of edge
detection, X coordinate, Y coordinate, correlation ratio, and rotation angle). The
writing of output settings can be set in the environmental setting menu.
See page 149.
Command
Response
Error
Reading the setting data
The setting data (all data except for the registered screen) for the current program
number is sent back to the PC. The setting data can be saved in the PC.
Command
Response
Checksum range: Data 0 to Data 1239 (1240 data)
Data 0 to Data 1239: Binary data
Calculation is not necessary for the checksum.
Writing the setting data
The setting data (all data except for the registered screen) is written to the current
program number. The stored setting data can be written from the PC to the CV-
701(P)/751(P). Be sure to save the data using the SS [Cr] command after writing.
Command
Response
Checksum range: Data 0 to Data 1239 (1240 data)
Data 0 to Data 1239: Binary data
Calculation is not necessary for the checksum.
Error
Reading the environmental setting data
The environmental setting data for the current program number is sent back to the
PC. The setting data can be saved in the PC.
Command
Response
Checksum range: Data 0 to Data 83
Data 0 to Data 83: Binary data
Calculation is not necessary for the checksum.
A W , cr
NUM
1
NUM
0
NUM
2
NUM
3
NUM
4
NUM
5
NUM
6
A W cr
E R , A W , #1#2 cr
S R cr
S R ,
...
Data
0
Data
1
Data
2
Data
1238 cr
Data
1238
Check-
sum
S W ,
...
Data
0
Data
1
Data
2
Data
1238 cr
Data
1239
Check-
sum
S W cr
E R , S W , #1 #2 cr
S A cr
S A ,
...
Data
0
Data
1
Data
2
Data
83 cr
Check-
sum
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
184 184
8
Writing the environmental setting data
The environmental setting data is written to the current program number. The
stored setting data can be written from the PC to the CV-701(P)/751(P). Be sure to
save the data after writing.
Command
Response
Checksum range: Data 0 to Data 83
Data 0 to Data 83: Binary data
Calculation is not necessary for the checksum.
Error
Note: The environmental setting includes the white balance adjustment. When
setting two or more CVs, be sure to select the optimal white balance value for each
CV.
Reading the registered screen
The image data for the registered screen is sent back to the PC. Data for one line
is sent in a single communication. To read the whole image, the transmission is
repeated to read the data from line 0 to 485.
Command
Response
Checksum range: Data 0 to Data 511 (512 data)
Data 0 to Data 511: Binary data
Cn: Camera No.
NUM: Line No. (Line 0 to 485) of image data
Calculation is not necessary for the checksum.
Writing the registered screen
The stored image data in the PC is written to the CVs registered screen. The
screen registration is saved when writing of image data of LINE 0 to 485 is com-
pleted.
Command
Response
Checksum range: Data 0 to Data 511 (512 data)
Data 0 to Data 511: Binary data
Cn: Camera No. (CAM1: 1, CAM2: 2)
NUM: Line No. (Line 0 to 485) of image data
Calculation is not necessary for the checksum.
S B ,
...
Data
0
Data
1
Data
2
Data
83 cr
Check-
sum
S B cr
E R , S B , #1#2 cr
B R Cn cr , ,
NUM
2
NUM
1
NUM
3
B R
Check-
sum cr ,
...
Data
510
Data
0
Data
1
Data
511
B W Cn , , ,
...
NUM
2
NUM
1
NUM
3
Data
1
Data
0
cr
Check-
sum
Data
510
Data
511
B W cr
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
185
8
Reading the input screen
The stored image saved in the CV is sent back to the PC. Data for one line is sent
in a single communication. To read the whole image, the transmission is repeated
to read the data from line 0 to 485. This operation is enabled during the transmis-
sion with O0 [Cr].
Command
Response
Checksum range: Data 0 to Data 511 (512 data)
Data 0 to Data 511: Binary data
Cn: Camera No. (CAM1: 1, CAM2: 2)
NUM: Line No. (Line 0 to 485) of image data
Calculation is not necessary for the checksum.
Note: When incorrect commands are sent, the error message is sent back. The
error message is defined as below.
!: Command character
Reading the saved screen
The stored image of the registered screen saved in the CV is sent back to the PC.
Data for one line is sent in a single communication. To read the whole image, the
transmission is repeated to read the data from line 0 to 485.
Command
Response
Checksum range: Data 0 to Data 511 (512 data)
Data 0 to Data 511: Binary data
NUM0: Registered screen No., NUM1/2/3: Line No. of image data (Line 0 to 485)
Calculation is not necessary for the checksum.
Reading the window number
The current window number is sent back to the PC.
Command
Response
NUM: Window No. (1 to 8)
B I Cn cr , ,
NUM
2
NUM
1
NUM
3
B I
Check-
sum cr ,
...
Data
510
Data
0
Data
1
Data
511
E R cr , , #1#2
B N cr , ,
NUM
2
NUM
1
NUM
0
NUM
3
B N
Check-
sum cr ,
...
Data
510
Data
0
Data
1
Data
511
U R cr
U R , cr
NUM
1
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
186 186
8
Writing the window number
The current window number is changed to the number specified with the PC.
Command
Response
NUM: Window No. (1 to 8)
Registering the screen
Save the image captured with the camera as the registered screen.
Command
Response
NUM: 0=CAM1 and CAM2, 1=CAM1, 2=CAM2
Saving the setting data
The setting data is saved in the CVs internal memory. When the power is turned
off without sending this command, the setting data for RS-232C will be lost.
Command
Response
Changing to RUN mode
The CV-701(P)/751(P) is switched to RUN mode.
Command
Response
U W , cr
NUM
1
U W cr
D cr
NUM
1
D cr
NUM
1
S S cr
S S cr
R 0 cr
R 0 cr
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
187
8
8.3.2 Commands for CompactFlash memory
Send the commands to access the CompactFlash memory. The commands are
available while the CV is in program mode with O0 [Cr].
Reading the setting data and registered screen
Read the setting data and image data of the specified file from the CompactFlash
memory. The 16 programs stored under the specified file are written to the CV,
overwriting all current programs.
Command
Response
NUM1 to NUM3: File No. in the CompactFlash memory
Reading the environmental setting data
Read the environmental setting data into the CV from the CompactFlash memory.
Command
Response
NUM1 to NUM3: File No. in the CompactFlash memory
Note: The environmental setting includes the white balance adjustment. When
setting two or more CVs, be sure to select the optimal white balance value for each
CV.
Reading setting data for one program
Setting data for only one program is sent to the CV from the CompactFlash
memory.
Command
Response
NUM1 to NUM3: File No. in the CompactFlash memory
a1 to 2: Program No. to be read in the file, b1 to 2: Program No. where the read
program will be written to the CV.
Writing the saved screen
The image data of the saved screen is written on the CompactFlash memory.
Command
Response
When the CompactFlash memory is full, an error message will be sent.
Important: Make sure not to insert or eject the CompactFlash memory while
access to the CompactFlash memory is made.
C S cr ,
NUM
2
NUM
1
NUM
3
C S cr
C C cr ,
NUM
2
NUM
1
NUM
3
C C cr
C 1 , , a1a2 , b1b2 cr
NUM
2
NUM
1
NUM
3
C 1 cr
C N cr
C N cr
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
188 188
8
8.3.3 Commands in RUN mode
Send [R][0][Cr] to the CV-701(P)/751(P) to switch it to the RUN mode before using
the following commands.
Trigger
Input a trigger signal
Command
Response
(Numerical value data: Depends on the output data setting. Refer to the Output
data format on page 189.)
Re-outputting data
Output the latest processing result data again.
Command
Response
(Numerical value data: Depends on the output data setting. Refer to the Output
data format.)
Stopping
Stop the operation of the CV-701(P)/751(P)
Command
Response
(with external trigger)
T 1 cr
T 1 cr ,
Numerical
value data
T G cr ,
Numerical
value data
M 0 cr
M 0 cr ,
Numerical
value data
O 0 cr
O 0 cr
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
189
8
8.3.4 Output data format
The data formats available with the AW commands are listed below. The available
data for output is limited depending on the measurement mode.
1. In the INS+POS mode, the output format of the INS measured data is the same as that for INS/
TRG, and the format of the position adjustment is the same as that for ABS.POS.
2. When the edge detection mode is set to either the X- or Y-axis direction only, the coordinate of the
other axis is not output.
3. The output is disabled when the rotation angle is not used.
4. The coordinate output is fixed to sign + five-digit integer +decimal point + three-digit fraction.
5. The data output is stopped when the CONT input is short-circuited in the ARE/CON mode.
6. REF WND (reference window) uses the absolute value for judgment or data output. The other
windows use the difference from the REF WND.
7. The output format for INSPECT output varies as follows depending on the measurement mode.
OUTER, INNER Measured dimension
GAP, PITCH Measured dimension (Maximum and minimum values)
EDGE NO Number of detected edge
COUNT Counted number
POINT Color extraction condition of each point
STAIN Measured value
GRAVITY Detected X and Y coordinates, angle of principal axis
8. Each digit represents the condition of color extraction as follows:
0: Background color, 1: Detected color, 9: Unassigned
(Example) 01019999
t a m r o f a t a D e d o m M A R G O R P
m e t i t u p t u O
e d o m l a m r o N G R T / S N I
. S B A
S O P
. L E R
S O P
. 6
t l u s e r t n e m g d u J
) e l b a t p e c c a ( 0
) e l b a t p e c c a n u ( 1

s l e x i p f o . o N
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 4 8 3 4 2

S N I
. 7

. 2
e t a n i d r o o c X
. 4 , 2
0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0
9 9 9 . 9 9 9 9 9

e t a n i d r o o c Y
. 4 , 2
0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0
9 9 9 . 9 9 9 9 9

o i t a r n o i t a l e r r o C
0 0 0
0 0 1

e l g n a n o i t a t o R
. 3
0 8 1
9 7 1 +

A
R
E
A
I
N
S
+
P
O
S

1
.
A
R
E
/
C
O
N

5
.
E
D
G
E
P
A
T
T
E
D
G
E
P
A
T
T
G
R
A
V
I
T
Y
S
T
A
I
N
P
O
I
N
T

8
.
E
D
G
E

N
O
.
C
O
U
N
T
P
I
T
C
H
G
A
P
I
N
N
E
R
O
U
T
E
R
Measured dimension
00000.000
99999.999
Number of edges
00000.000
99999.999
Counted number
00000.000
99999.999
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
190 190
8
Example
To output the number of pixels in Window 1 and Window 2:
Order of output data
WO1 processing WO2 processing ... WO8 processing [cr]
The judgment output and pixel output are given only for the windows with
settings assigned.
[,] is output as a separator between data.
Example
When WO1 and WO3 are set in AREA mode:
(1) If the output data is selected as [1][0][0][0][0][0][0] (the judgment output for
WO1 to WO8), the output data is as follows.
(2) If the output data is selected as [1][1][0][0][0][0][0] (the judgment and pixel
output for WO1 to WO8), the output data is as follows.
Example
When WO1 and WO2 are used in ABS.POS mode:
If the output data is selected as [0][0][0][1][1][1][1] (X and Y coordinates, correlation
ratio, rotation angle):
1 2 3 4 5 6 , 0 0 1 0 0 0 cr
Window 1 has
123,456 pixels.
Window 2 has
1,000 pixels.
1 , 0 cr
WO3:OK
WO1:NG
(Acceptable)
(Unacceptable)
1 1 2 3 4 5
, ,
, 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 cr
WO1
WO1:NG WO3:OK
WO3
No. of
pixels in
No. of
pixels in
(Unacceptable) (Acceptable)
+
0 1 4 2 0 0 . , , . 0 2 9 0 3 0 0 - 3 6 0 0 0 0
+
0 5
+
0 3 0 , , 0 . 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 2 0
+
5 . 0 0
8 9
+
0 8 0 , 0 cr
Rotation angle
of WO2
Correlation
ratio of WO2
Rotation angle
of WO1
X coordinate
of WO2
Y coordinate
of WO2
Correlation ratio
of WO1
Y coordinate
of WO1
X coordinate
of WO1
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
191
8
Example
When WO1 and WO2 are used in INS+POS mode:
(1) When AREA is set to WO1, and OUTER is set to WO2, and the X and Y
coordinates are selected for PATT output in position adjustment.
If the output data is selected as [1][1][1][1][1][0][0] (output of the judgment
result, number of pixels, INS, and X and Y coordinates), and one camera is
connected:
(2) Output conditions are the same as that for (1). Two cameras are connected.
WO1: CAM1, WO2: CAM2
+
0 0 2 3 5 1 4 , , , , . 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 0
+
0 1 2 0 0 , . 1 . . 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0
WO1:OK WO2:NG
(Acceptable)
Y coordinate of
position adjustment
X coordinate of
position adjustment
No. of
pixels in
WO1
OUTER of WO2
(Unacceptable)
+
0 0 2 3 5 1 4 , , , , 0 0 5 0 0 . 1 0 0
+
0 1
+
0 2 0 , , 0 0 0 0 2 . 0 1 0 0 . 0 0
+
0 3 0 5 0 , , 0 0 0 0 2 8 . 0 0 . 0 0
OUTER of WO2
Y coordinate of position
adjustment for CAM2
X coordinate of position
adjustment for CAM2
X coordinate of position
adjustment for CAM1
Y coordinate of position
adjustment for CAM1
WO1: OK
(Acceptable)
No. of
pixels in
WO1
WO2: NG
(Unacceptable)
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
192 192
8
Example
When AUTO SEQUENCE is activated:
If;
Two AREA windows are set to Program No. 0
One OUTER window is set to Program No. 1
X and Y coordinates of the ABS.POS window are set to Program No. 2
The output data is selected as [0][1][1][1][1][0][0] (Output of No. of pixels, INS, and
X and Y coordinates):
When the AUTO SEQUENCE function is activated, the data is output sequentially
with [cr] output for each program No.
0 1 0 0 0 3 , 0 5 2 0 0 0
+ 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 . 0
cr
cr
+ 0 1 5 0 5 0 0 . 0
, + 1 0 0 3
. 2 0 cr
The measured value of Program No. 2
The measured value of Program No. 1
The measured value of Program No. 0
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
193
8
8.3.5 Command list
Commands in PROGRAM mode
n o i t c n u F d n a m m o C n o i t p i r c s e D
. o N m a r g o r p d a e R
t n e s s i . o N m a r g o r P
. C P e h t o t k c a b
. o N m a r g o r p e t i r W
s i . o N m a r g o r P
. d e g n a h c
. g n i t t e s t u p t u o d a e R
t u p t u o t n e r r u c e h T
t n e s s i n o i t c e l e s a t a d
. C P e h t o t k c a b
. g n i t t e s t u p t u o e t i r W
s i a t a d t u p t u o e h T
. d e t c e l e s
. s g n i t t e s d a e R
o t k c a b t n e s s i g n i t t e S
. C P e h t
. s g n i t t e s e t i r W
e h t o t n e t t i r w s i g n i t t e S
. V C
l a t n e m n o r i v n e d a e R
. g n i t t e s
g n i t t e s l a t n e m n o r i v n E
. C P e h t o t k c a b t n e s s i
l a t n e m n o r i v n e e t i r W
. g n i t t e s
g n i t t e s l a t n e m n o r i v n E
. V C e h t o t n e t t i r w s i
d e r e t s i g e r d a e R
. n e e r c s
e h t r o f a t a d e g a m i e h T
s i n e e r c s d e r e t s i g e r
. C P e h t o t k c a b t n e s
d e r e t s i g e r e t i r W
. n e e r c s
n e e r c s d e r e t s i g e r e h T
. V C e h t o t n e t t i r w s i
. n e e r c s t u p n i d a e R
V C e h t n i e g a m i e h T
o t k c a b t n e s s i y r o m e m
. C P e h t
. n e e r c s d e v a s d a e R
e h t r o f a t a d e g a m i e h T
t n e s s i n e e r c s d e v a s
. C P e h t o t k c a b
. o N w o d n i w d a e R
t n e s s i . o N w o d n i W
. C P e h t o t k c a b
. o N w o d n i w e t i r W
s i . o N w o d n i W
. d e g n a h c
. n e e r c s r e t s i g e R . d e r e t s i g e r s i n e e r c s A
. s g n i t t e s e v a S
n i d e v a s e r a s g n i t t e S
e l i t a l o v n o n e h t
. y r o m e m
N U R
N U R o t t e s s i V C e h T
. e d o m
P R cr
P W cr ,
NUM
1
NUM
2
A R cr
A W
...
cr ,
NUM
0
NUM
1
NUM
6
S R cr
S W
...
cr , 0
DATA DATA DATA
1 1239
Check-
sum
S A cr
S B ,
...
cr 0 1
DATA DATA DATA
75
Check-
sum
B R Cn , , cr
NUM
1
NUM
2
NUM
3
B W , , , Cn
NUM
3
NUM
2
NUM
1
...
cr 0 511
Check-
sum
DATA DATA
B I Cn , , cr
NUM
1
NUM
2
NUM
3
B N , , cr
NUM
1
NUM
0
NUM
2
NUM
3
U R cr
U W , cr
NUM
1
D cr
NUM
1
S S cr
R 0 cr
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
194 194
8
Commands for CompactFlash memory
Commands in RUN mode
8.3.6 Applications of RS-232C communication setting
This section describes the basic flow of the communication setting.
Communication settings with RS-232C
When a trigger signal is input, the measured results will be output with the RS-
232C communication.
Output setting with the CV-701(P)/751(P)
Refer to page 149 to select the output data in the environmental setting menu.
When a trigger signal is input, the measured results will be output with the RS-
232C communication.
n o i t c n u F d n a m m o C n o i t p i r c s e D
d n a a t a d g n i t t e s d a e R
. n e e r c s d e r e t s i g e r
d n a a t a d g n i t t e S
e r a n e e r c s d e r e t s i g e r
e h t m o r f d a e r
h s a l F t c a p m o C
. y r o m e m
l a t n e m n o r i v n e d a e R
. g n i t t e s
s g n i t t e s l a t n e m n o r i v n E
e h t m o r f d a e r e r a
h s a l F t c a p m o C
. y r o m e m
e n o r o f s g n i t t e s d a e R
. m a r g o r p
e n o r o f s g n i t t e S
m o r f d a e r e r a m a r g o r p
h s a l F t c a p m o C e h t
. y r o m e m
. n e e r c s d e v a s e t i r W
d e v a s r o f a t a d e h T
e h t n i d e v a s s i n e e r c s
h s a l F t c a p m o C
. y r o m e m
C S , cr
NUM
1
NUM
2
NUM
3
C C , cr
NUM
1
NUM
2
NUM
3
C 1 , ,
a1a2 , b1b2 cr
NUM
1
NUM
2
NUM
3
C N cr
n o i t c n u F d n a m m o C n o i t p i r c s e D
r e g g i r T
s i l a n g i s r e g g i r t A
. t u p n i
a t a d t u p t u o - e R
s i a t a d t s e t a l e h T
. n i a g a t u p t u o
p o t S
s i n o i t a r e p o e h T
. d e p p o t s
T 1 cr
M 0 cr
O 0 cr
Send O0
AW*******
cr
cr
Send back O0 cr
PC CV
Measurement mode
Measurement mode
Send SS cr Waiting for response
Send RO cr Waiting for response
: RUN operation is stopped.
: Agreed
: Set the output data.
: Agreed
: Save the changed data.
: Agreed
: Set the CV to RUN mode.
: Agreed
Waiting for response
Send back AW cr Waiting for response
Send back SS cr Waiting for response
Send back RO cr Waiting for response
Waiting for response
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
191
8
Example
When WO1 and WO2 are used in INS+POS mode:
(1) When AREA is set to WO1, and OUTER is set to WO2, and the X and Y
coordinates are selected for PATT output in position adjustment.
If the output data is selected as [1][1][1][1][1][0][0] (output of the judgment
result, number of pixels, INS, and X and Y coordinates), and one camera is
connected:
(2) Output conditions are the same as that for (1). Two cameras are connected.
WO1: CAM1, WO2: CAM2
+
0 0 2 3 5 1 4 , , , , . 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 0
+
0 1 2 0 0 , . 1 . . 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0
WO1:OK WO2:NG
(Acceptable)
Y coordinate of
position adjustment
X coordinate of
position adjustment
No. of
pixels in
WO1
OUTER of WO2
(Unacceptable)
+
0 0 2 3 5 1 4 , , , , 0 0 5 0 0 . 1 0 0
+
0 1
+
0 2 0 , , 0 0 0 0 2 . 0 1 0 0 . 0 0
+
0 3 0 5 0 , , 0 0 0 0 2 8 . 0 0 . 0 0
OUTER of WO2
Y coordinate of position
adjustment for CAM2
X coordinate of position
adjustment for CAM2
X coordinate of position
adjustment for CAM1
Y coordinate of position
adjustment for CAM1
WO1: OK
(Acceptable)
No. of
pixels in
WO1
WO2: NG
(Unacceptable)
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
192 192
8
Example
When AUTO SEQUENCE is activated:
If;
Two AREA windows are set to Program No. 0
One OUTER window is set to Program No. 1
X and Y coordinates of the ABS.POS window are set to Program No. 2
The output data is selected as [0][1][1][1][1][0][0] (Output of No. of pixels, INS, and
X and Y coordinates):
When the AUTO SEQUENCE function is activated, the data is output sequentially
with [cr] output for each program No.
0 1 0 0 0 3
, 0 5 2 0 0 0
+ 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 . 0
cr
cr
+ 0 1 5 0 5 0 0 . 0
, + 1 0 0 3
. 2 0 cr
The measured value of Program No. 2
The measured value of Program No. 1
The measured value of Program No. 0
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
193
8
8.3.5 Command list
Commands in PROGRAM mode
n o i t c n u F d n a m m o C n o i t p i r c s e D
. o N m a r g o r p d a e R
t n e s s i . o N m a r g o r P
. C P e h t o t k c a b
. o N m a r g o r p e t i r W
s i . o N m a r g o r P
. d e g n a h c
. g n i t t e s t u p t u o d a e R
t u p t u o t n e r r u c e h T
t n e s s i n o i t c e l e s a t a d
. C P e h t o t k c a b
. g n i t t e s t u p t u o e t i r W
s i a t a d t u p t u o e h T
. d e t c e l e s
. s g n i t t e s d a e R
o t k c a b t n e s s i g n i t t e S
. C P e h t
. s g n i t t e s e t i r W
e h t o t n e t t i r w s i g n i t t e S
. V C
l a t n e m n o r i v n e d a e R
. g n i t t e s
g n i t t e s l a t n e m n o r i v n E
. C P e h t o t k c a b t n e s s i
l a t n e m n o r i v n e e t i r W
. g n i t t e s
g n i t t e s l a t n e m n o r i v n E
. V C e h t o t n e t t i r w s i
d e r e t s i g e r d a e R
. n e e r c s
e h t r o f a t a d e g a m i e h T
s i n e e r c s d e r e t s i g e r
. C P e h t o t k c a b t n e s
d e r e t s i g e r e t i r W
. n e e r c s
n e e r c s d e r e t s i g e r e h T
. V C e h t o t n e t t i r w s i
. n e e r c s t u p n i d a e R
V C e h t n i e g a m i e h T
o t k c a b t n e s s i y r o m e m
. C P e h t
. n e e r c s d e v a s d a e R
e h t r o f a t a d e g a m i e h T
t n e s s i n e e r c s d e v a s
. C P e h t o t k c a b
. o N w o d n i w d a e R
t n e s s i . o N w o d n i W
. C P e h t o t k c a b
. o N w o d n i w e t i r W
s i . o N w o d n i W
. d e g n a h c
. n e e r c s r e t s i g e R . d e r e t s i g e r s i n e e r c s A
. s g n i t t e s e v a S
n i d e v a s e r a s g n i t t e S
e l i t a l o v n o n e h t
. y r o m e m
N U R
N U R o t t e s s i V C e h T
. e d o m
P R cr
P W cr ,
NUM
1
NUM
2
A R cr
A W
...
cr ,
NUM
0
NUM
1
NUM
6
S R cr
S W
...
cr , 0
DATA DATA DATA
1 1239
Check-
sum
S A cr
S B ,
...
cr 0 1
DATA DATA DATA
75
Check-
sum
B R Cn , , cr
NUM
1
NUM
2
NUM
3
B W , , , Cn
NUM
3
NUM
2
NUM
1
...
cr 0 511
Check-
sum
DATA DATA
B I Cn , , cr
NUM
1
NUM
2
NUM
3
B N , , cr
NUM
1
NUM
0
NUM
2
NUM
3
U R cr
U W , cr
NUM
1
D cr
NUM
1
S S cr
R 0 cr
Chapter 8 RS-232C Interface
194 194
8
Commands for CompactFlash memory
Commands in RUN mode
8.3.6 Applications of RS-232C communication setting
This section describes the basic flow of the communication setting.
Communication settings with RS-232C
When a trigger signal is input, the measured results will be output with the RS-
232C communication.
Output setting with the CV-701(P)/751(P)
Refer to page 149 to select the output data in the environmental setting menu.
When a trigger signal is input, the measured results will be output with the RS-
232C communication.
n o i t c n u F d n a m m o C n o i t p i r c s e D
d n a a t a d g n i t t e s d a e R
. n e e r c s d e r e t s i g e r
d n a a t a d g n i t t e S
e r a n e e r c s d e r e t s i g e r
e h t m o r f d a e r
h s a l F t c a p m o C
. y r o m e m
l a t n e m n o r i v n e d a e R
. g n i t t e s
s g n i t t e s l a t n e m n o r i v n E
e h t m o r f d a e r e r a
h s a l F t c a p m o C
. y r o m e m
e n o r o f s g n i t t e s d a e R
. m a r g o r p
e n o r o f s g n i t t e S
m o r f d a e r e r a m a r g o r p
h s a l F t c a p m o C e h t
. y r o m e m
. n e e r c s d e v a s e t i r W
d e v a s r o f a t a d e h T
e h t n i d e v a s s i n e e r c s
h s a l F t c a p m o C
. y r o m e m
C S , cr
NUM
1
NUM
2
NUM
3
C C , cr
NUM
1
NUM
2
NUM
3
C 1 , ,
a1a2 , b1b2 cr
NUM
1
NUM
2
NUM
3
C N cr
n o i t c n u F d n a m m o C n o i t p i r c s e D
r e g g i r T
s i l a n g i s r e g g i r t A
. t u p n i
a t a d t u p t u o - e R
s i a t a d t s e t a l e h T
. n i a g a t u p t u o
p o t S
s i n o i t a r e p o e h T
. d e p p o t s
T 1 cr
M 0 cr
O 0 cr
Send O0
AW*******
cr
cr
Send back O0 cr
PC CV
Measurement mode
Measurement mode
Send SS cr Waiting for response
Send RO cr Waiting for response
: RUN operation is stopped.
: Agreed
: Set the output data.
: Agreed
: Save the changed data.
: Agreed
: Set the CV to RUN mode.
: Agreed
Waiting for response
Send back AW cr Waiting for response
Send back SS cr Waiting for response
Send back RO cr Waiting for response
Waiting for response
Chapter 9
Specifications
This section describes the specifications and dimensions.
9.1 Specifications ................................................................... 196
9.2 Dimensions ....................................................................... 198
Chapter 9 Specifications
196
9
9.1 Specifications
Controller
l e d o M ) P ( 1 5 7 - V C ) P ( 1 0 7 - V C
s l e x i p f o . o N s l e x i p 0 0 0 , 0 4 2 : ) V ( 0 8 4 x ) H ( 8 0 5
e l c y c s s e c o r P ) . g n i t t e s e h t n o g n i d n e p e d s e i r a V ( s / c 0 3
l e v e l y r a n i B
r o n o i t c a r t x e r o l o c y b g n i s s e c o r p n o i s r e v n o c y r a n i b r o l o C
g n i s s e c o r p t s a r t n o c r o l o c
n o i t a r t s i g e r m a r g o r P
) d e s u e r a s a r e m a c o w t n e h w s m a r g o r p 8 ( s m a r g o r p 6 1
. e l b a t c e l e s y l l a n r e t x e e r a s m a r g o r P
s n e e r c s d e r e t s i g e r f o . o N ) m a r g o r p / s n e e r c s 2 r o m a r g o r p / n e e r c s 1 ( s n e e r c s 6 1
s n o i t c n u F
e d o M
r o s n e s a e r A e r a u q s e e r f / e r a u q s / e l c r i c : e p a h s w o d n i W , m a r g o r p / . x a m 8
n o i t c e t e d n o i t i s o p e t u l o s b A e r a u q s : e p a h s w o d n i W , m a r g o r p / 4
n o i t c e t e d n o i t i s o p e v i t a l e R e r a u q s : e p a h s w o d n i W , m a r g o r p / 4
n o i t c e p s n I
e d o m
h t d i W
t n e m e r u s a e m
e r a u q s : e p a h s w o d n i W , m a r g o r p / 8
p a g / h c t i P
t n e m e r u s a e m
e r a u q s : e p a h s w o d n i W , m a r g o r p / 8
. o N e g d E e r a u q s : e p a h s w o d n i W , m a r g o r p / 8
t n u o C e l c r i c / e r a u q s : e p a h s w o d n i W , m a r g o r p / 8
n o i t c e t e d n i a t S c r a / e c n e r e f m u c r i c / e l c r i c / e r a u q s : e p a h s w o d n i W , m a r g o r p / 8
r o s n e s t n i o P w o d n i w / 8 , m a r g o r p / 8
y t i v a r G
t n e m e r u s a e m
e l c r i c / e r a u q s : e p a h s w o d n i W , m a r g o r p / 8
- t s u j d A
t n e m
t n e m t s u j d a n o i t i s o P
, e l g n a s i x a l a p i c n i r p / y t i v a r g y r a n i b r o l o c / r o s n e s e n i l / h c r a e s t s a r t n o c r o l o C
0 8 1 n o i t a t o r , n o i t c e r i d s i x a - Y / - X
t n e m t s u j d a n o i t a n i m u l l I
m a r g o r p / w o d n i w t n e m t s u j d a n o i t a n i m u l l i 1
) . d e s u e r a s a r e m a c 2 n e h w m a r g o r p / 2 (
g n i s s e c o r p e c n a v d A
) n o i t c n u f R E T L I F (
e g d e / s i s a h p m e e g d e / e g a r e v a / n a i d e m / k n i r h s / d n a p x E
t r e v n i / p u t n i t / p u s s e n t h g i r b / g n i d a h s / n o i t c a r t x e
n o i t a l u c l a c a t a D t e s f f O + ) h c n i , m m , l e x i p ( n o i s r e v n o c t i n U
e v a S n e e r c S s n e e r c s 8
p l e H g n i t t e S g n i t t e s n o p u r e t e m a r a p e v a S
t u p n I
t u p n i a r e m a C 2
- n o C
l o r t
t u p n i
t u p n i r e g g i r t l a n r e t x E ) t u p n i e g a t l o v - n o N ( 1
n o i t c e l e s m a r g o r P ) t u p n i e g a t l o v - n o N ( e l b a t c e l e s s m a r g o r p 6 1 , ) 4 x ( t u p n i a t a D
n o i t c e t e d s u o u n i t n o C
s i . o N m a r g o r p e h t n e h w r e g g i r t l a n r e t x e n a t u o h t i w d e u n i t n o c s i n o i t c e t e D
) t u p n i e g a t l o v - n o N ( . n o s i t u p n i T N O C e l i h w d e g n a h c
n o i t a r t s i g e r n e e r c S
. n o s i t u p n i C E R e l i h w l a n g i s r e g g i r t a y b d e r e t s i g e r e r a s n e e r c S . 2
) t u p n i e g a t l o v - n o N (
n o i t c e l e s w o d n i W ) t u p n i e g a t l o v - n o N ( e l b a t c e l e s s w o d n i w 8 , ) 3 x ( t u p n i a t a D
D C L
r o t i n o m
l e n a P r o l o c l l u f , h c n i 5 . 5 T F T d e d i v o r p t o N
t h g i l k c a B
e b u t t n e c s e r o u l f e d o h t a c d l o C
) s r h 0 0 0 , 0 4 : e f i L (
d e d i v o r p t o N
d r a c y r o m e M y r o m e m h s a l F t c a p m o C
t u p t u o o e d i V m e t s y s C S T N o t g n i m r o f n o C
e c a f r e t n i C 2 3 2 - S R
t u p t u o / t u p n i l o r t n o c d n a t u p t u o e u l a v l a c i r e m u n , h c 1
) e l b a t c e l e s . x a m s p b 0 0 4 , 8 3 : e t a r d u a B (
t u p t u o l o r t n o C
N P N ) . x a m V 0 3 ( . x a m A m 0 5 , ) 9 x ( r o t c e l l o c - n e p o N P N
P N P ) . x a m V 0 3 ( . x a m A m 0 5 , ) 9 x ( r o t c e l l o c - n e p o P N P
t u p t u o e u l a v l a c i r e m u N ) . x a m V 0 3 ( . x a m A m 0 1 , s t i b 3 1 y r a n i B
t u p t u o g o l a n A 0 0 1 : e c n a d e p m i t u p t u o , t u p t u o V 4 o t 0
e g a u g n a l y a l p s i D e l b a t c e l e s h s i l g n E / e s e n a p a J
g n i t a R
e g a t l o v y l p p u s r e w o P % 0 1 C D V 4 2
n o i t p m u s n o c t n e r r u C A 4 . 1 A m 0 0 7
- r i v n E
t n e m n o
e r u t a r e p m e t t n e i b m A ) F 4 0 1 + o t 2 3 ( C 0 4 + o t 0
y t i d i m u h e v i t a l e R n o i t a s n e d n o c o N , % 5 8 o t 5 3
t h g i e W g 0 0 9 . x o r p p A : r e l l o r t n o C
e t o m e R , g 0 0 4 . x o r p p A : r e l l o r t n o C
g 0 6 1 . x o r p p A : e l o s n o c l o r t n o c
Chapter 9 Specifications
197
9
Camera
l e d o M 0 7 0 - V C
p u k c i p e g a m I
t n e m e l e
m e t s y S D C C r o l o c e p y t r e f s n a r t e n i l - r e t n I
g n i d a e R ) g n i d a e r l l a ( e v i s s e r g o r P
e z i S h c n i 3 / 1
s l e x i p f o . o N s l e x i p 0 0 0 , 0 5 3
e p a h s l e x i P r e t l i f B G R / l e x i p - e r a u q S
r e t t u h s c i n o r t c e l E
, 0 0 0 1 / 1 , 0 0 5 / 1 , 0 5 2 / 1 , 5 2 1 / 1 , 0 0 1 / 1 , 0 6 / 1 , 0 5 / 1 , 0 3 / 1
. c e s 0 0 0 0 1 / 1 , 0 0 0 4 / 1 , 0 0 0 2 / 1
d o h t e m t n u o m s n e L t n u o m C
t n e m n o r i v n E
t n e i b m A
e r u t a r e p m e t
) F 4 0 1 o t 2 3 ( C 0 4 + o t 0
e v i t a l e R
y t i d i m u h
n o i t a s n e d n o c o N , % 5 8 o t 5 3
t h g i e W ) e l b a c m 3 g n i d u l c n i ( g 0 1 3 . x o r p p A : a r e m a C
Chapter 9 Specifications
198
9
9.2 Dimensions
Controller: CV-701(P)
Unit: mm
Remote control console: OP-30938
Accessory: CV-701(P) only
Unit: mm
43
45.2
47.2
37.3
20.7
53.2
35.4
112
(70)
162
150 4
100
100
2
4.4 4.4
8.7 3.9
(52)
When memory
card is attached 2- 4-4
Mounting hole
44
R2
3
18
103
6.5
12
4.5
Cable length: 3 m
11
23
12
Chapter 9 Specifications
199
9
Controller: CV-751(P)
Unit: mm
Panel cutout for CV-751(P) controller
Unit: mm
22.3
(191) (Dimension of mounting bracket)
175
(60)
23.2
25
60
83
(Effective
display area)
130
5
55
57.2
59.2
(63.7)
When memory
card is attached
111 (Effective display area)
Panel thickness
1.2 to 4.0 mm
Mounting bracket
Mounting screw
169
207
124 0
+1
0
+1
190
Chapter 9 Specifications
200
9
Camera: CV-070
Unit: mm
When plastic fitting (accessory) is attached.
Close-up adapters (Option: OP-35406)
Unit: mm
Lens
Unit: mm
I 3.5 mm lens: CV-L3
30
30
42.8
8
8-M3
18
28
10
12
15
1/4-20UNC
Depth: 5 max.
6.6
Cable length: 3 m
32
30
10
Depth: 4 max.
40
10
18
14.7
24.8
31
34.9
2-M4
1/4-20UNC
2-M3
Depth: 5 max.
Depth: 6 max.
Depth: 5 max.
0.5 1 5 4 4 22 4
1 inch
32UN
1 inch
32UN
1 inch
32UN
10
146
80
M1.7
45
43
P0.75
37.5 17.526
32
CU1
Crest32
2
*Diaphragm ring lock screw
3
*Focus ring lock screw
3
.
5
m
m








1
:
1
.
6
Chapter 9 Specifications
201
9
I 6 mm lens: CV-L6
I 16 mm lens: CV-L16
I 50 mm lens: CV-L50
l e d o M 3 L - V C 6 L - V C 6 1 L - V C 0 5 L - V C
e c n a t s i d l a c o F m m 5 . 3 m m 6 m m 6 1 m m 0 5
m g a r h p a i D E S O L C o t 6 . 1 F E S O L C o t 4 . 1 F E S O L C o t 6 . 1 F E S O L C o t 8 . 1 F
e g n a r k n a l b - t n i o P m 1 . 0 m 2 . 0 m 4 . 0 m 0 . 1
t n u o M t n u o m C t n u o m C t n u o m C t n u o m C
w e r c s r e t l i F
r e t e m a i d
5 7 . 0 P m m 0 . 3 4 5 . 0 P m m 5 . 0 3 5 . 0 P m m 0 . 7 2 5 . 0 P m m 5 . 0 3
t h g i e W g 0 9 . x o r p p A g 0 7 . x o r p p A g 4 4 . x o r p p A g 5 5 . x o r p p A
37
Isopleths
6
m
m




1
:
1
.
4
32.8
32
30.5
P0.5
17.526
A B
A B
1.4 engraving
position
19
12.8
37
4
A-A B-B
29.4
32
90
Diaphragm ring lock screw
Focus ring lock screw
CU1
Crest 32
29.3
24.5
4
7.5
4.4
17.526
30
A B
A B
A-A B-B
Isopleths
1.6 engraving
position
27P0.5
1
6
m
m











1

:

1
.
6
37
30
12.1
16
CU1
Crest 32
Focus ring lock screw Diaphragm ring lock screw
90
B
3-M1.7
3-M1.7
32
30.5
P0.5
120
120
95
105
A
A B
Diaphragm ring
lock screw Focus ring lock screw
12.4
37 17.526
CU1
Crest 32
1.8 engraving
position
4
5.5
A-A B-B
Isopleths
5
0
m
m



1
:
1
.
8
Chapter 9 Specifications
202
9
TFT color monitor (Option: CV-M30)
Unit: mm
Panel cutout for CV-M30 TFT color monitor
Unit: mm
l e n a p D C L
e z i s n e e r c s y a l p s i D m m ) V ( 2 5 . 5 8 x ) H ( 6 3 . 1 1 1 , h c n i 5 . 5
e z i s x i r t a M ) V ( 0 4 2 x ) H ( 3 x 0 2 3
r o l o C r o l o c l l u F
m e t s y s e v i r D m e t s y s x i r t a m e v i t c a T F T
t u p n i o e d i V 5 7 p - p V 0 . 1
g n i t a R
e g a t l o v y l p p u s r e w o P % 0 1 C D V 4 2
n o i t p m u s n o c t n e r r u C . x a m A m 0 0 7
t n e m n o r i v n E
e r u t a r e p m e t t n e i b m A ) F 4 0 1 + o t 2 3 ( C 0 4 + o t 0
y t i d i m u h e v i t a l e R n o i t a s n e d n o c o N , % 5 8 o t 5 3
t h g i e W g 0 7 5 . x o r p p A
155
124
0
+1
0
+1
189
158
125
111
(Effective display area)
160
175
(Dimension of mounting bracket)
51
(Dimension of
mounting bracket)
130
(Effective display area)
7
52
Panel thickness
1.0 to 2.0 mm
Mounting bracket
Mounting screw
20
40
90
123
137
83
Chapter 9 Specifications
203
9
Ring lamp (Option: CV-R11)
Illuminator
* When mounting bracket (L) is attached. (Cable length: 2 m)
Unit: mm
Amplifier
Unit: mm
Mounting bracket (S)
Unit: mm
1. The average service life is the normal life expectancy of a lamp before the initial luminance
deteriorates to 70%, with continuous use under an ambient temperature of 25C (and in a vibration-
free environment.
2. The initial average luminance is the luminance of a lamp in mint condition.
m e t s y s g n i t h g i L ) z H k 5 3 o t 5 2 ( t h g i l y c n e u q e r f - h g i h e p y t r e t r e v n I
p m a l f o r o l o c s u o n i m u L ) d e c n a l a b - t h g i l y a d ( X E - N
s n o i s n e m i d p m a L . m m 6 5 : r e t e m a i d r e n n i , m m 0 8 : r e t e m a i d r e t u O
e f i l e c i v r e s e g a r e v A
. 1
. s r h 0 0 0 2 . x o r p p A
) . % 0 7 o t s e t a r o i r e t e d e c n a n i m u L (
e c n a n i m u l e g a r e v a l a i t i n I
. 2
) r e t n e c p m a l e h t w o l e b m m 0 5 2 ( % 0 1 x l 0 0 8
y t i l i b a t s e c n a n i m u L % 0 1 C A V 0 0 1 f o n o i t a i r a v e h t r o f % 5 . 1
g n i t a R
e g a t l o v y l p p u s r e w o P ) n o m m o c z H 0 6 / 0 5 ( % 0 1 C D V 4 2
n o i t p m u s n o c t n e r r u C A V 0 2
t n e m n o r i v n E
e r u t a r e p m e t t n e i b m A ) F 2 2 1 o t 1 4 + ( C 0 5 + o t 5 +
y t i d i m u h e v i t a l e R n o i t a s n e d n o c o N , % 0 9 o t 5 3
t h g i e W
r o t a n i m u l l I
g 0 5 1 . x o r p p A
) t e k c a r b g n i t n u o m d n a r e s u f f i d g n i d u l c n i (
r e i f i l p m A ) e l b a c g n i d u l c n i ( g 0 5 6 . x o r p p A
14.8
41.5
23
92 21.2
30
74
90
48 40
98
Camera mounting hole 4- M2.5 x R4
33
48
16
15
42.5
36 55 69
90
20
15
22
16.8 23.2 30
14
20
2.8
R1.6
16
110
140
15 15 80
110
15 15
40
8
Chapter 9 Specifications
204
9
Mounting stand for CV-751(P) (Option: OP-35481)
Unit: mm
B
B
173
100
7
13
30
17
79
28.5
12.3
57
7.1
28.6
16.4
99.7
47.4
17
13.5
4.1
4.6
10
14.1
70
B-B Cross section
Appendices
This section describes general troubleshooting procedures, a list of op-
tional parts, and an index.
Appendix A General Troubleshooting .................................... 206
Appendix B Optional Parts List ............................................... 208
Appendix C Index ..................................................................... 210
Appendix D Sample Sheets for Setup Menu .......................... 213
Appendix E Sample Sheets for Testing.................................. 215
Appendices
206
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
Appendix A General Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
m o t p m y S e s u a C e l b a b o r P n o i t c a e v i t c e r r o C e c n e r e f e R
e g a p
y l p p u s r e w o P
. n o n r u t t o n s e o d
t o n s i e l b a c r e w o p e h T
. y l t c e r r o c d e t c e n n o c
e l b a c r e w o p e h t t c e n n o C
. y l t c e r r o c
1 1
s r a e p p a e g a m i o N
. r o t i n o m e h t n o
s d e e c x e y l p p u s r e w o p e h T
. e g n a r c i f i c e p s e h t
n i h t i w y l p p u s r e w o p e h t e s U
. e g n a r c i f i c e p s e h t
6 9 1
t o n s i e l b a c r o t i n o m e h T
. y l t c e r r o c d e t c e n n o c
n e h t d n a r e w o p e h t f f o n r u T
e l b a c r o t i n o m e h t t c e n n o c
. y l t c e r r o c
2 1
t o n s i r e v o c s n e l e h T
. d e v o m e r
. r e v o c s n e l e h t e v o m e R

t o n s i m g a r h p a i d s n e l e h T
. y l r e p o r p d e t s u j d a
m g a r h p a i d s n e l e h t t s u j d A
. y l r e p o r p
3 1
t o n s i y l p p u s r e w o p e h T
. n o d e n r u t
e h t e s U . r e w o p e h t n o n r u T
e h t n i h t i w y l p p u s r e w o p
. e g n a r c i f i c e p s
3 1
t o n s i e l b a c a r e m a c e h T
. y l t c e r r o c d e t c e n n o c
n e h t d n a r e w o p e h t f f o n r u T
e l b a c a r e m a c e h t t c e n n o c
. y l t c e r r o c
2 1
d e t s u j d a t o n s i r o t i n o m e h T
. y l t c e r r o c
, e u h , s s e n t h g i r b e h t t s u j d A
. c t e
4 1
u n e m e h T
o n t u b , s r a e p p a
. s r a e p p a e g a m i
l a m r o n b a n A
. s r a e p p a e g a m i
d n a s u c o f s n e l e h T
d e t s u j d a t o n e r a m g a r h p a i d
. y l r e p o r p
d n a s u c o f e h t t s u j d A
. m g a r h p a i d 3 1
t o n s i d e e p s r e t t u h s e h T
. e l b a t i u s
r e t t u h s r e p o r p e h t t e S
. d e e p s
1 *
- t h g i l D C C d n a s n e l e h T
t o n e r a e c a f r u s g n i v i e c e r
. n a e l c
D C C d n a s n e l e h t n a e l C
h t i w e c a f r u s g n i v i e c e r - t h g i l
. r e t s u d r i a n a

l o r t n o c e t o m e r e h T
t o n s e o d e l o s n o c
. e t a r e p o
e l o s n o c l o r t n o c e t o m e r e h T
. y l t c e r r o c d e t c e n n o c t o n s i
n e h t d n a , r e w o p e h t f f o n r u T
e l o s n o c e h t t c e n n o c
. y l t c e r r o c
2 1
t o n s i r o t c e l e s l o r t n o c e h T
. e l o s n o c e h t o t t e s
o t r o t c e l e s l o r t n o c e h t t e S
. e l o s n o c e h t
1 1
C 2 3 2 - S R
s i n o i t a c i n u m m o c
d e l b a s i d
s i e l b a c n o i t a c i n u m m o c e h T
. y l t c e r r o c d e t c e n n o c t o n
n e h t d n a , r e w o p e h t f f o n r u T
n o i t a c i n u m m o c e h t t c e n n o c
. y l t c e r r o c e l b a c
1 8 1
n o i t a c i n u m m o c r e p o r p A
. d e s u t o n s i e l b a c
d n a g n i r i w e h t k c e h C
. e l b a c r e p o r p a t c e n n o c
1 8 1
l o c o t o r p n o i t a c i n u m m o c e h T
e h t n o y l r e p o r p t e s t o n s i
. C P
n o i t a c i n u m m o c e h t e g n a h C
. C P e h t n o l o c o t o r p 0 8 1
t n e m g d u J
c i r e m u n / t l u s e r
t o n s i e u l a v
. t u p t u o
t o n s i t i n u t u p t u o e h T
. y l t c e r r o c d e t c e n n o c
t i u c r i c t u p t u o e h t o t r e f e R
t i n u t u p t u o e h t t c e n n o c d n a
. y l t c e r r o c
5 6 1
t o n s i ) P ( 1 5 7 / ) P ( 1 0 7 - V C e h T
. e d o m N U R o t t e s
e d i l s e l o s n o c e h t e d i l S
. e d o m N U R t e s o t h c t i w s
2 *
t e s t o n s i e c n a r e l o t e h T
. y l t c e r r o c
. y l t c e r r o c e c n a r e l o t e h t t e S
3 *
t o n s e o d w o d n i w e h T
. y l r e p o r p t e g r a t e h t e s o l c n e
g n i n n i g e b s g n i t t e s e h t y r t e R
. n o i t a r t s i g e r n e e r c s e h t m o r f
e s u , n e t f o e t a i v e d s t e g r a t f I
t n e m t s u j d a n o i t i s o p e h t
. n o i t c n u f
4 *
t o n s i n o i t a n i m u l l i e h T
. e l b a t s
n o i t a n i m u l l i e l b a t s a e s U
e g a m i r o f d e n g i s e d p m a l
. g n i s s e c o r p
5 1
Appendices
207
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
e g a s s e M e s u a C n o i t c a e v i t c e r r o C
A R E M A C
. D E G N A H C
G N I T T E S T I N I
. d e g g u l p n u s i r o t c e n n o c a r e m a c e h T
. d e t c e n n o c s i a r e m a c r e h t o n A
e h t k c e h c , r e w o p e h t f f o n r u T
n e h t d n a , n o i t c e n n o c a r e m a c
o T . n i a g a r e w o p e h t n o n r u t
a r e m a c e h t e g n a h c y l l a u t c a
] T N E [ e h t s s e r p , n o i t c e n n o c
d n a s g n i t t e s e h t e z i l a i t i n i o t y e k
. n i a g a a r e m a c e h t t e s
1 M A C E S U . d e t c e n n o c s i 2 a r e m a C y l n O , a r e m a c e n o y l n o g n i s u n e h W
o t t c e n n o c , r e w o p e h t f f o n r u t
e h t n o n r u t n e h t d n a , 1 M A C e h t
. n i a g a r e w o p
, s a r e m a c o w t g n i t c e n n o c n e h W
e h t k c e h c , r e w o p e h t f f o n r u t
d n a , 1 M A C h t i w n o i t c e n n o c
. n i a g a r e w o p e h t n o n r u t n e h t
G N I T T E S . T I N I s i y r o m e m l a n r e t n i e h t n i a t a d e h T
. l a m r o n b a
e z i l a i t i n i o t y e k ] T N E [ e h t s s e r P
. s g n i t t e s e h t
T E S T O N N A C
E E R C S
. d e r r u c c o e g a m a d l a n r e t n I E C N E Y E K t s e r a e n r u o y t c a t n o C
. e c i f f o
*1. See page 38.
*2. See page 152.
*3. See pages 63, 77, 93, 114.
*4. See page 39.
Error messages
m o t p m y S e s u a C e l b a b o r P n o i t c a e v i t c e r r o C e c n e r e f e R
e g a p
t h g i l k c a b e h T
. f f o s n r u t
s i e r u t a r e p m e t r e n n i e h T
. h g i h
s i e r e h t t a h t e r u s n E
r o f e c a p s t n e i c i f f u s
e h t d n u o r a n o i t a l i t n e v
e h t t a h t e r u s n E . r e l l o r t n o c
. g n i k r o w s i n a f g n i l o o c
t s e r a e n r u o y t c a t n o C
d n i f u o y f i e c i f f o E C N E Y E K
. y t i l a m r o n b a y n a
7
r e w o p e h T
r o t a c i d n i
d e r s e t a n i m u l l i
. t h g i l
Appendices
208
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
Appendix B Optional Parts List
This section lists parts that allow you to maximize the function of the CV-701(P)/
751(P).
e m a n t c u d o r P l e d o M e c n a r a e p p A n o i t p i r c s e D
s n e l m m 5 . 3 3 L - V C
m m 5 . 3 a h t i w s n e l e l g n a - e d i w A
. h t g n e l l a c o f
s n e l m m 6 6 L - V C
m m 6 a h t i w s n e l e l g n a - e d i w A
. h t g n e l l a c o f
s n e l m m 6 1 6 1 L - V C
l a c o f m m 6 1 a h t i w s n e l d r a d n a t s A
. h t g n e l
s n e l m m 0 5 0 5 L - V C
m m 0 5 a h t i w s n e l o t o h p e l e t A
. h t g n e l l a c o f
p m a l g n i R 1 1 R - V C
t a h t p m a l g n i r r e t e m a i d m m 0 8 n A
r e h g i h e p y t r e t r e v n i s r e f f o
r e z i r a l o p l a i c e p S ( . t h g i l y c n e u q e r f
) 7 8 3 5 3 - P O . e l b a l i a v a s i
r e t p a d a p u - e s o l C
t e s
6 0 4 5 3 - P O
m m 2 2 d n a , 0 1 , 5 , 1 , 5 . 0 f o t e s A
. s r e t p a d a p u - e s o l c
r o t i n o m r o l o c T F T 0 3 M - V C
D C L r o l o c e l i f o r p w o l , h c n i - 5 . 5 A
r o n o i t a l l a t s n i p o t e l b a T . r o t i n o m
l e n a p l o r t n o c a o t g n i t n u o m l e n a p
. e l b a l i a v a s i
y l p p u s r e w o P
* 3 U - V K
W 6 U - V K
t a h t y l p p u s r e w o p t n e r r u c C D A
. A 4 . 1 , C D V 4 2 s e d i v o r p
) A 8 . 0 : W 6 U - V K (
. e p o r u E n i e l b a l i a v a t o n s i 3 U - V K *
Appendices
209
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
e m a n t c u d o r P l e d o M e c n a r a e p p A n o i t p i r c s e D
e l b a c O / I 1 4 3 5 3 - P O
. r o t c e n n o c O / I e h t r o f e l b a C
) m 3 : h t g n e l e l b a c (
e l b a c C 2 3 2 - S R
) n i p - 9 b u s - D (
2 8 3 5 3 - P O
C 2 3 2 - S R r o f e l b a c l a i c e p s A
. n o i t a c i n u m m o c
) m 3 : h t g n e l e l b a c (
e l b a c C 2 3 2 - S R
) n i p - 5 2 b u s - D (
3 5 2 5 2 - P O
t u p t u o g o l a n A
e l b a c
0 2 4 1 4 - P O
e h t o t d e t c e n n o c e b o t e l b a C
. l a n i m r e t t u p t u o g o l a n a
) m 2 : h t g n e l e l b a c (
h s a l F t c a p m o C
y r o m e m
2 3 M - R N y r o m e m h s a l F t c a p m o C B M - 2 3 A
r o t p a d a A I C M C P 1 A - C
a e c a l p o t r e t p a d a n A
C P e h t o t y r o m e m h s a l F t c a p m o C
C P a f o t o l s d r a c
d n a t S 1 8 4 5 3 - P O
t o n s i ) P ( 1 5 7 - V C e h t n e h w d e s U
. d e t n u o m - l e n a p
Appendices
210
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
Appendix C Index
Number
24 VDC power supply ................................. 3, 4, 11, 12, 156
24 VDC power supply input terminal ............................... 3, 4
Alphabet
A
ABS. POS ................................................................. 23, 118
ACTION........................................................................... 174
ANG ........................................................................ 114, 120
ARE/CON.............................................................. 18, 57, 65
AREA mode ................................................................ 18, 57
AREA mode/DATA............................................................ 63
AREA mode/PROCES1 .................................................... 66
AREA mode/PROCES2 .................................................... 66
AREA mode/PROCES3 .................................................... 66
AREA mode/PROCES4 .................................................... 66
AREA mode/RAW SCRN.................................................. 66
AREA mode/color menu.................................................... 68
AREA mode/main menu.................................................... 66
AREA mode/window menu ............................................... 67
AREA/DET ........................................................................ 61
AREA/MEASURE.............................................................. 61
AREA/TOL ........................................................................ 62
AREAFILT ....................................................................... 101
AUTO ................................................................................ 47
AUTO OFF ...................................................................... 146
AUTO SEQUENCE ......................................................... 147
AVERAGE....................................................................... 103
Analog output .................................................................. 166
Analog output terminal ............................................ 3, 4, 166
Angle adjustment ............................................................ 114
Angle adjustment ............................................................ 114
Arc [ARC] window, drawing an.......................................... 52
B
BACK ........................................................................ 69, 102
BL WH ........................................................................ 129
BL WH ........................................................................ 129
BRIGHT adjustment trimmer ............................................. 14
Backlight .......................................................................... 146
Basic setting procedures ................................................... 36
Basic settings/CLR TYPE (Color type) .............................. 44
Basic settings/COLOR ...................................................... 44
Basic settings/COLOR1 .................................................... 44
Basic settings/COLOR2 .................................................... 44
Basic settings/Color extraction.......................................... 44
Basic settings/GRAY......................................................... 44
Basic settings/MODE selection ......................................... 37
Basic settings/PROGRAM No. selection........................... 36
Basic settings/SCRN REG................................................ 39
Basic settings/SEL SCRN ................................................. 42
Basic settings/WIND1 ....................................................... 41
Binary conversion................................................................ ix
C
CALENDAR..................................................................... 149
CHANGE......................................................................... 145
CLEAR ........................................................................ 49, 53
[CLEAR] key................................................................ 32, 33
CLOCK............................................................................ 149
COLOR adjustment trimmer .............................................. 14
Color extraction ......... 44, 47, 48, 49, 69, 102, 105, 131, 132
COPY (Color setting) ........................................................ 44
COPY (Setting data) ....................................................... 146
COPY NO. ....................................................................... 146
COUNT ................................................................. 20, 71, 80
COUNT/DATA................................................................... 83
COUNT/MASK .................................................................. 81
COUNT/MEASURE........................................................... 80
COUNT/TOL ..................................................................... 81
COUNT/maximum number ................................................ 80
COUNT/saving the settings............................................... 83
Camera ......................................................................... 8, 13
Camera connector ........................................................... 3, 4
Circular [CIRC] window, drawing a ................................... 51
Circumference [RING] window, drawing a ....................... 52
Close-up adapter ................................................................. 9
Color gradation processing ................................................. ix
CompactFlash memory ........................................... 171, 172
CompactFlash memory slot ............................................ 3, 4
Control selector ............................................................. 3, 11
Correlation ratio............................................................... 116
Cursor ([L][M][ ][ ]) keys ............................................... 32
Cursor keys ....................................................................... 32
D
DATA CAL....................................................................... 137
Data format ..................................................................... 189
Dimensions ..................................................................... 198
E
EDGE EM........................................................................ 103
EDGE EX ........................................................................ 103
EDGE NO.............................................................. 20, 71, 75
EDGE SEN.............................................................. 100, 130
EDGE mode .................................................................... 127
This section provides a list of terms used in this manual in alphabetical order.
M
M
Appendices
211
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
[ENT] key .......................................................................... 32
[ESCAPE] key ............................................................. 32, 33
EXECUTE ....................................................................... 175
EXPAND ......................................................................... 103
EXTERNAL ..................................................................... 145
Edge detection .......................................................... 24, 109
Environmental setting...................................................... 144
F
FILE NAME ..................................................................... 175
FILE TYPE ...................................................................... 174
FILTER................................................................... 103, 131
FIT........................................................................... 116, 120
Features .............................................................................. ix
Free square [F SQR] window, drawing a .......................... 52
G
GRAVITY .............................................................. 20, 71, 91
GRAVITY/MASK ............................................................... 93
GRAVITY/MEASURE........................................................ 91
GRAVITY/TOL .................................................................. 93
GRAVITY/TOL for angle ................................................... 93
GRAY ................................................................................ 44
H
HUE adjustment trimmer ................................................... 14
I
I/O connector ................................................... 3, 4, 156, 157
I/O terminal .............................................................. 3, 4, 156
IGNORE ............................................................................ 48
INNER ......................................................................... 22, 70
INS mode .......................................................................... 70
INS+POS .................................................................. 22, 106
INS/COLOR menu ............................................................ 99
INS/DATA.......................................................................... 97
INS/FILTER..................................................................... 103
INS/MEASURE ................................................................. 76
INS/Main menu ................................................................. 97
INS/PROCES1 .................................................................. 97
INS/PROCES2 .................................................................. 97
INS/PROCES3 .................................................................. 97
INS/PROCES4 .................................................................. 97
INS/RAW SCRN................................................................ 97
INS/TOL ............................................................................ 77
INS/TRG............................................................................ 70
INS/TRG (AREA) .............................................................. 57
INS/TRG (EDGE NO) ........................................................ 71
INS/Window menu ............................................................ 98
INT UP ............................................................................ 103
INTERNAL ...................................................................... 145
INVERT ........................................................................... 103
Illuminator .......................................................................... 15
Initialization ..................................................................... 142
Input circuit diagram........................................................ 165
Input/Output in [PROGRAM] mode ................................. 143
K
Key-lock function............................................................. 152
L
LABEL ............................................................................. 175
LANGUAGE .................................................................... 145
LEVEL ..................................................................... 105, 132
LEVEL (STAIN) ................................................................. 89
LEVEL histogram .................................................... 105, 133
Lens ................................................................................. 3,4
M
MASK .................................................................... 62, 81, 93
MEASURE ........................................................................ 61
MEDIAN .......................................................................... 103
MEMORYCARD.............................................................. 175
MONITOR adjustment trimmer ........................................... 3
Mask window......................................................... 62, 81, 93
Menu hierarchy ................................................................. viii
Menu screen ..................................................................... 34
Mode selection slide switch............................................... 33
Modular connector .......................................................... 3, 4
Monitor ................................................................................ 3
Monitor (CV-M30) .......................................................... 4, 12
Monitor cable..................................................................... 11
N
N.C. ................................................................................. 145
N.O.................................................................................. 145
No. .................................................................................... 36
O
OBJT1/OBJT2................................................................. 125
OFFSET .......................................................................... 138
OUT MODE..................................................................... 145
OUTER........................................................................ 19, 70
OUTPUT SYMBOL ......................................................... 145
Optional parts .................................................................. 208
Optional settings ............................................................. 134
Output circuit diagram..................................................... 165
Over-scanning type monitor .............................................. 10
P
PITCH (Gap pitch) ....................................................... 19, 70
Appendices
212
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
POINT ................................................................... 20, 71, 84
POINT/[MATCH] ............................................................... 86
POINT/[SET] ..................................................................... 85
POINT/point ...................................................................... 84
POINT/size ........................................................................ 84
POINT: presence/absence setting .................................... 85
POINT: saving the setting ................................................. 86
[PROGRAM No.] key .................................................. 32, 36
PW (Pattern window) ...................................................... 112
Panel keys..................................................................... 3, 32
Pixel .................................................................................. 19
Pixels, number of .............................................................. 57
Position detection ...................................................... 23, 109
Position detection/DATA ................................................. 119
Position detection/FILTER .............................................. 131
Position detection/PROCES1 ......................................... 119
Position detection/PROCES2 ......................................... 119
Position detection/RAW SCRN ....................................... 119
Position detection/color menu ......................................... 122
Position detection/main menu ......................................... 119
Position detection/window menu (EDGE) ....................... 122
Position detection/window menu (PATT) ........................ 120
Power indicator ............................................................... 3, 4
Processing time display .............................. 58, 72, 106, 110
Program No. ...................................................................... 36
R
RAW SCRN....................................................................... 55
REF WIND (Reference window) ....................................... 26
RS-232C BPS ................................................................. 145
RS-232C OUT......................................................... 145, 149
RS-232C interface........................................................... 179
RUN external control ....................................................... 153
RUN mode ...................................................................... 152
[RUN/PROGRAM] key ...................................................... 32
Relative position detection ........................................ 25, 124
Remote control console ............................................ 3, 4, 12
Ring lamp .......................................................................... 15
S
SAVE................................................................... 64, 79, 117
SAVE SCR ...................................................................... 134
SCAN ................................................................................ 75
[SCREEN] key............................................................. 32, 33
SEN (Color sensitivity) ...................................................... 48
SETUP MENU................................................................. 140
SHADING........................................................................ 103
SHRINK........................................................................... 103
SHUTTER ......................................................................... 38
SHUTTER speed .............................................................. 38
SPAN .............................................................................. 137
SRCH SEN (Search sensitivity) ...................................... 125
SRCH SPD (Search speed) ............................................ 125
STAIN.................................................................... 20, 71, 87
STAIN/LEVEL ................................................................... 89
STAIN/MEASURE............................................................. 87
STAIN/SIZE....................................................................... 88
SVD SCRN...................................................................... 134
SW (Search window) ....................................................... 113
Saving running image ..................................................... 134
Screen registration ............................................................ 39
Screen selection................................................................ 55
Screen selection display ..................................... 60, 74, 112
Square [SQR] window, drawing a ..................................... 51
T
TEST ............................................................................... 136
TINT UP .......................................................................... 103
TOL (AREA) ...................................................................... 62
TOL (COORD) ................................................................ 114
TOL (DEV) ...................................................................... 116
TOL (INS) .......................................................................... 77
TRIGGER........................................................................ 145
[TRIGGER] key ........................................................... 32, 33
Tolerance display ................................................ 58, 72, 106
Tolerance for angle adjustment ....................................... 116
Two cameras..................................................................... 42
Two cameras, connecting ................................................. 42
U
Under-scanning type monitor ............................................ 10
Unit conversion ......................................................... 22, 137
V
Video output terminal .................................................... viii, ix
W
WHITE BALANCE........................................................... 148
WINDOW X ..................................................................... 129
WINDOW Y ..................................................................... 129
[WINDOW] key .................................................................. 32
Window ............................................................................. 50
Window No. ....................................................................... 41
Working distance................................................................. 8
Z
Zoom................................................................................. 47
Appendices
213
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s

Appendix D Sample Sheets for Setup Menu

Sample sheets for setup menu
The adjusting procedures in SETUP menu ( page 140) use a black rectangle
placed in the field of view. Cut out this page and use it to adjust the settings.
Cut out the rectangle according to the angle of the field of view.
T
e
a
r
-
o
f
f

l
i
n
e
Appendices
214
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
Appendices
215
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
Appendix E Sample Sheets for Testing
The setting procedures in this manual use the following samples.
Cut out this page and use them to practice changing the settings.
T
e
a
r
-
o
f
f

L
i
n
e
Appendices
216
A
p
p
e
n
d
i
c
e
s
217
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials
and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If
any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples
were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products
and not to represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said
models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to
KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for
inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE,
at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no
charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply
to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to
improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized
modification, misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to exces-
sive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Compo-
nents which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various
Products. They are only suggestions, and it is Buyers responsibility to
ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyers intended use. KEYENCE
will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the
Products.
(3) The Products and any samples (Products/Samples) supplied to
Buyer are not to be used internally in humans, for human transportation, as
safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state
otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or
misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally
Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any
liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/
Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES
ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL
EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE
TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDEN-
TAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUD-
ING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS
OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS
OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS,
THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES
OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS,
EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS AD-
VISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTYS CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR
ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the
foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.
BUYERS TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS: If the Products/Samples pur-
chased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must
provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications,
manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to Buyer per-
taining to the Products/Samples.
C
V
-
7
0
0

S
e
r
i
e
s


U
s
e
r

s

M
a
n
u
a
l
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
KEYENCE CORPORATION, 2000 CV700-UM-3-0202 Printed in Japan
Users Manual
High-speed, High-accuracy, Color Vision System
CV-700 Series
96M0568
AFFILIATED COMPANIES
KEYENCE CORPORATION OF AMERICA
Phone: 201-930-0100 Fax: 201-930-0099
KEYENCE DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Phone: 06102-36 89-0 Fax: 06102-36 89-100
KEYENCE (UK) LIMITED
Phone: 01908-696900 Fax: 01908-696777
KEYENCE FRANCE S.A.
Phone: 01 47 92 76 76 Fax: 01 47 92 76 77
KEYENCE SINGAPORE PTE LTD
Phone: 392-1011 Fax: 392-5055
KEYENCE (MALAYSIA) SDN BHD
Phone: 03-252-2211 Fax: 03-252-2131
KEYENCE CORPORATION
1-3-14, Higashi-Nakajima,
Higashi-Yodogawa-ku,
Osaka, 533-8555, Japan
Phone: 81-6-6379-2211
Fax: 81-6-6379-2131
KEYENCE (THAILAND) CO., LTD
Phone: 02-369-2777 Fax: 02-369-2775
KEYENCE TAIWAN CO., LTD
Phone: 02-2627-3100 Fax: 02-2798-8925
KEYENCE (HONG KONG) CO., LTD
Phone: 3104-1010 Fax: 3104-1080
KEYENCE INTERNATIONAL TRADING
(SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.
Phone: 021-68757500 Fax: 021-68757550
KEYENCE KOREA CORPORATION
Phone: 02-563-1270 Fax: 02-563-1271